Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Title page
Alcatel-Lucent 1830
1354 RM-PhM Photonic Manager | Release 7.0
EMS REFERENCE GUIDE
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
8DG60013 JAAA
ISSUE 1
NOVEMBER 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Legal notice
Legal notice
Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.
Copyright © 2009 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
Contains proprietary/trade secret information which is the property of Alcatel-Lucent and must not be made available to, or copied or used by anyone outside
Alcatel-Lucent without its written authorization.
ot to be used or disclosed except in accordance with applicable agreements.
Conformance statements
Interference Information: Part 15 of FCC Rules
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If the equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the guidelines in this document, the
equipment may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference,
in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at the expense of the user.
Security statement
In rare instances, unauthorized individuals make connections to the telecommunications network through the use of remote access features. In such an event,
applicable tariffs require that the customer pay all network charges for traffic. Alcatel-Lucent cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any
allowance or give any credit for charges that result from unauthorized access.
Limited warranty
For terms and conditions of sale, contact your Alcatel-Lucent Account Team.
Ordering Information
For more ordering information, refer to "How to order" in the section titled "About this document."
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Contents
About this document
Purpose
.......................................................................................................................................................................................... xiii
xiii
Audience
....................................................................................................................................................................................... xiii
xiii
xiv
Document conventions ............................................................................................................................................................. xiv
Related information ................................................................................................................................................................... xiv
xiv
Document support
....................................................................................................................................................................... xv
xv
xv
Technical support ......................................................................................................................................................................... xv
How to order .................................................................................................................................................................................. xv
xv
Packaging collection and recovery requirements
............................................................................................................ xv
Recycling/Take-Back/Disposal of Product ...................................................................................................................... xvii
How to comment ....................................................................................................................................................................... xvii
xvii
1
Overview
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1-1
1-1
1354 RM-PhM server ............................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1354 RM-PhM hardware configurations ........................................................................................................................... 1-2
1354 RM-PhM communication
............................................................................................................................................ 1-3
1354 RM-PhM release specifications ................................................................................................................................. 1-3
1354 RM-PhM engineering guidelines
1354 RM-PhM scaling
.............................................................................................................................. 1-3
............................................................................................................................................................. 1-4
1-4
ew features introduced in 1354 RM-PhM R7.0
2
.......................................................................................................... 1-4
System administration
2-1
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
iii
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
System requirements ................................................................................................................................................................. 2-3
2-3
Interfaces and protocols ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-3
2-3
1354 RM-PhM redundant servers ........................................................................................................................................ 2-6
Installing the 1354 RM-PhM
........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-11
2-11
Before you start
........................................................................................................................................................................ 2-11
2-11
Installing the 1354 RM-PhM on a Linux or Solaris x86/x64 platform
Installing the 1354 RM-PhM on Windows
............................................................... 2-12
.................................................................................................................... 2-16
Starting and stopping the server and client
........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-22
2-22
1354 RM-PhM server watchdog ........................................................................................................................................ 2-22
Starting the 1354 RM-PhM server on Linux or Solaris x86/x64
........................................................................... 2-23
Stopping the 1354 RM-PhM server on Linux or Solaris x86/x64 ......................................................................... 2-25
Starting the 1354 RM-PhM server on Microsoft Windows
..................................................................................... 2-26
Stopping the 1354 RM-PhM server on Microsoft Windows
Starting a client session
................................................................................... 2-27
......................................................................................................................................................... 2-28
2-28
2-31
Stopping a client session ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-31
Configuring the file transfer properties of the 1354 RM-PhM server .................................................................. 2-32
Configuring the TP properties of the 1354 RM-PhM server
............................................................................... 2-33
Configuring the TP properties of the network elements ........................................................................................ 2-34
1354 RM-PhM database backup and restore
........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-35
2-35
1354 RM-PhM database backup ........................................................................................................................................ 2-36
1354 RM-PhM database restore ......................................................................................................................................... 2-38
Recovering from file corruption without having to restore from a backup
....................................................... 2-39
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
iv
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Performing a server switch-over ........................................................................................................................................ 2-40
1696 ROADM and 1830 PSS network element database backup and restore
........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-41
2-41
Performance Monitoring (PM) Archive Setting
........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-44
2-44
S MP Trap Alarm Forwarding
........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-46
2-46
RADIUS server and user authentication
........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-50
2-50
1354 RM-PhM user management
........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-69
2-69
E user management
........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-75
2-75
1354 RM-PhM login session settings
........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-79
2-79
1696 ROADM and 1830 PSS network element software management
........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-82
2-82
1354 RM-PhM management of Red-C RAMA Amplifier & EDFA Booster
........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 2-90
2-90
3
Configuring and navigating the network
3-1
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-1
Types of network views
........................................................................................................................................................... 3-2
3-2
3-6
Discovering network elements .............................................................................................................................................. 3-6
Configuring network links
................................................................................................................................................... 3-14
Showing topological connections ...................................................................................................................................... 3-16
Configuring the network element and network fiber topology
.............................................................................. 3-17
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
v
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability
....................................................................................................... 3-22
Managing optical power levels ........................................................................................................................................... 3-23
Using the automatic power management interface
Managing APS groups
..................................................................................................... 3-29
........................................................................................................................................................... 3-37
3-37
CLI cut-thru
............................................................................................................................................................................... 3-42
3-42
TL1 cut-thru
.............................................................................................................................................................................. 3-43
3-43
3-44
WebUI cut-thru ......................................................................................................................................................................... 3-44
4
Monitoring system events and network alarms
4-1
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-1
Overview of network alarms
.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-3
4-3
Opening an alarm window for a managed object or group
.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-7
4-7
Acknowledging an alarm
.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-9
4-9
Suppressing alarms
........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-10
4-10
Clearing an alarm
........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-11
4-11
Using the 1354 RM-PhM log view
........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-12
4-12
Performance monitoring
........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-15
4-15
Starting and stopping PM collection
Viewing PM data and raw PM data
................................................................................................................................ 4-16
.................................................................................................................................. 4-17
Configuring PM and TCA profiles .................................................................................................................................... 4-17
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
vi
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Troubleshooting Wavelength Tracker alarms
........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-18
4-18
Determining the source of an alarm
................................................................................................................................. 4-19
Determining the WaveKeys used for a service
Querying the WaveKeys
............................................................................................................. 4-21
....................................................................................................................................................... 4-22
4-22
Troubleshooting the WaveKey insertion failed alarm ................................................................................................ 4-23
Troubleshooting the Missing WaveKey alarm .............................................................................................................. 4-24
Troubleshooting the Unexpected WaveKey alarm
Troubleshooting the Duplicate WaveKey alarm
...................................................................................................... 4-26
.......................................................................................................... 4-27
Troubleshooting the Invalid WaveKey alarm ................................................................................................................ 4-29
Troubleshooting a power out of range alarm
........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 4-30
4-30
5
Managing services
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5-1
Setting service preferences
.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-2
5-2
Listing and editing services
.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-3
5-3
Creating or editing a wavelength service
.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-5
5-5
Importing and exporting service definitions
........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 5-13
5-13
Discovering services in the network
........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 5-15
5-15
Unmanaging services in the network
........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 5-16
5-16
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
vii
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Contents
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Partial services
........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 5-17
5-17
Sub-rate service
........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 5-18
5-18
Sub-rate service creation via service wizard
................................................................................................................. 5-21
1696R and 1830 PSS interoperability
........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 5-24
5-24
Glossary
Index
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
viii
List of tables
1
Command syntax rules ............................................................................................................................................. xiv
2-1
1354 RM-PhM to network element protocols and ports
2-2
MA/Transport to G E protocols and ports
............................................................................. 2-3
.................................................................................................. 2-6
2-3
Task list for configuring and using a RADIUS authentication server
................................................. 2-51
2-4
1354 RM-PhM user role permissions
4-1
WaveKey encoding and decoding points ........................................................................................................ 4-18
.............................................................................................................. 2-72
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
ix
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
List of figures
1-1
1696 ROADM and 1830 PSS network management system
.................................................................... 1-2
2-1
1354 RM-PhM redundant servers
2-2
EMS Status window
2-3
1354 RM-PhM installation wizard - last chance to cancel
...................................................................... 2-14
2-4
1354 RM-PhM installation wizard - last chance to cancel
...................................................................... 2-20
2-5
Security alert dialog
2-6
System Settings dialog
2-7
S MP Trap Destinations table
2-8
The Add RADIUS Client dialog ........................................................................................................................ 2-53
2-9
The Add ative User dialog ................................................................................................................................ 2-54
3-1
Uni-directional light path power window
3-2
Optical power levels at a Wavelength Tracker detection point
3-3
Ingress monitor point power management window
3-4
Egress monitor point power management window ..................................................................................... 3-32
3-5
Bi-directional path power trace .......................................................................................................................... 3-34
3-6
Uni-directional light path power window
3-7
APS Views window ................................................................................................................................................ 3-38
3-8
APS Group attributes window ............................................................................................................................ 3-38
4-1
1354 RM-PhM Topology View
5-1
Wavelength service fiber endpoints
5-2
Manually power-managed service ....................................................................................................................... 5-9
5-3
Automatically power-managed service
....................................................................................................................... 2-6
................................................................................................................................................. 2-9
............................................................................................................................................... 2-30
2-30
.......................................................................................................................................... 2-45
........................................................................................................................... 2-47
...................................................................................................... 3-23
.............................................................. 3-25
................................................................................... 3-32
...................................................................................................... 3-35
............................................................................................................................ 4-3
.................................................................................................................... 5-8
........................................................................................................... 5-10
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
xi
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
About this document
About this document
Purpose
This document provides information about accessing the 1354 RM-PhM and using it to
configure and manage the 1696 ROADM and 1830 PSS network. It contains the
following chapters:
•
Chapter 1, “Overview”
•
•
•
Chapter 2, “System administration”
Chapter 3, “Configuring and navigating the network”
Chapter 4, “Monitoring system events and network alarms”
•
Chapter 5, “Managing services”
Audience
This document is intended for the following users of the 1696 ROADM and 1830 PSS
documentation library:
•
•
•
administrators
operators
maintenance personnel
1696 ROADM and 1830 PSS products are meant to be installed, operated, and
maintained by personnel who have the knowledge, training, and qualifications required to
safely perform the tasks assigned to them. The information, processes, and procedures
contained in the 1696 ROADM and 1830 PSS product documentation are intended for
use by trained and qualified personnel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
xiii
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
About this document
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Document conventions
Command syntax
Table 1, “Command syntax rules” (p. xiv) describes the command syntax rules used in
this document.
Table 1
Command syntax rules
Syntax format
Description
bold
Commands and keywords. Enter command line arguments that are
in bold exactly as written.
italics
Variables. You must substitute a value for command line
arguments that are in italics.
[ optional ]
Optional keywords or variables. Enter command line arguments
that are enclosed in square brackets, if desired.
[ optional ]
{a|b|c}
{a|b|c}
[a|b|c]
[a|b|c]
Required alternate keywords or variables. You must choose one
command line argument enclosed within the braces. Choices are
separated by vertical (OR) bars.
Optional alternate keywords or variables. Choose one command
line argument enclosed within the braces, if desired. Choices are
separated by vertical (OR) bars.
Related information
The Alcatel-Lucent 1354 RM-PhM Release 7.0 Photonic Manager EMS Reference Guide
is part of a set of documents that support the 1696 ROADM and 1830 PSS System. The
following documents are available:
1696 ROADM Documents
1830 PSS Documents
Alcatel-Lucent 1696 ROADM Technical
Information Guide
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 Product
Information and Planning Guide
Alcatel-Lucent 1696 ROADM Hardware and
etwork Configuration Guide
Alcatel-Lucent 1696 ROADM Maintenance
and Troubleshooting Guide
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 Maintenance and
Trouble-Clearing Guide
Alcatel-Lucent 1696 ROADM CLI Reference
Guide
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS CLI Command
Guide
Alcatel-Lucent 1696 ROADM TL1 Reference
Guide
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS TL1 Command
Guide
Alcatel-Lucent 1696 ROADM Safety and
Compliance Guide
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Safety Guide
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
xiv
About this document
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1696 ROADM Documents
1830 PSS Documents
Alcatel-Lucent 1696 ROADM LPT Reference
Guide
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Engineering and
Planning Tool User Guide
Alcatel-Lucent 1696 ROADM Operations,
Administration, Maintenance, and
Provisioning Guide
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 User
Provisioning Guide
Alcatel-Lucent 1696 ROADM Web Interface
Reference Guide
Alcatel-Lucent 1696 ROADM Hardware
Installation Guide
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 Installation and
System Turn-up Guide
Alcatel-Lucent 1696 ROADM Commissioning
and Turn-up Guide
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBEH Edge
Device User Guide
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 MD4H Edge
Device User Guide
Document support
Alcatel-Lucent provides a referral telephone number for document support. Use this
number to report errors or to ask questions about the document. This is a non-technical
number. The referral number is 1 (888) 727 3615 (continental United States) or +1 (630)
713 5000 (for all countries).
Technical support
For technical support, contact your local customer support team. Reach them via the web
at http://alcatel-lucent.com/support at or the telephone number listed under the Technical
Assistance Center menu at http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/contact.
How to order
To order Alcatel-Lucent documents contact your local sales representative or use Online
Customer Support (OLCS) (https://support.alcatel-lucent.com).
Packaging collection and recovery requirements
Countries, states, localities, or other jurisdictions may require that systems be established
for the return and/or collection of packaging waste from the consumer, or other end user,
or from the waste stream. Additionally, reuse, recovery, and/or recycling targets for the
return and/or collection of the packaging waste may be established.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
xv
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
About this document
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For more information regarding collection and recovery of packaging and packaging
waste within specific jurisdictions, please contact the Alcatel-Lucent Field
Services/Installation - Environmental Health and Safety organization.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
xvi
About this document
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Recycling/Take-Back/Disposal of Product
Collect and treat electronic products bearing or referencing the following symbol, within
the European Union, at the end of their useful life in compliance with applicable
European Union and local legislation. Do not dispose of these products as part of
unsorted municipal waste. Due to materials that may be contained in the product, such as
heavy metals or batteries, the environment and human health may be negatively impacted
as a result of inappropriate disposal.
Note: In the European Union, a solid bar under the crossed-out wheeled bin indicates that
the product was put on the market after 13 August 2005.
Moreover, in compliance with legal requirements and contractual agreements, where
applicable, Alcatel-Lucent provides for the collection and treatment of Alcatel-Lucent
products at the end of their useful life. Alcatel-Lucent also provides for the collection and
treatment of existing products that have been displaced by Alcatel-Lucent equipment.
For information regarding take-back of equipment by Alcatel-Lucent, or for more
information regarding the requirements for recycling/disposal of product, please contact
your Alcatel-Lucent account manager or Alcatel-Lucent Take-Back Support at
takeback@alcatel-lucent.com.
How to comment
To order Alcatel-Lucent documents, contact your local sales representative or use Online
Customer Support (OLCS) (https://support.lucent.com).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
xvii
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
1
Overview
1
Overview
Purpose
This chapter provides an overview of the 1354 RM-PhM. It contains the following
sections:
Contents
1354 RM-PhM server
1-1
1354 RM-PhM hardware configurations
1-2
1354 RM-PhM communication
1-3
1354 RM-PhM release specifications
1-3
1354 RM-PhM engineering guidelines
1-3
1354 RM-PhM scaling
1-4
ew features introduced in 1354 RM-PhM R7.0
1-4
1354 RM-PhM server
The 1354 RM-PhM is a client-server system that is used to perform remote monitoring
and control of networks of 1696 ROADM and 1830 PSS equipment. Figure 1-1, “1696
ROADM and 1830 PSS network management system” (p. 1-2) shows a high level view
of the 1354 RM-PhM together with 1696 ROADM and 1830 PSS network elements. The
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS family includes the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32, the
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBEH Edge Device, and the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1
MD4H Edge Device.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
1-1
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Overview
1354 RM-PhM server
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-1 1696 ROADM and 1830 PSS network management system
The 1354 RM-PhM supports management of both 1696 ROADM and 1830 PSS network
elements. The 1354 RM-PhM server communicates with the network elements using the
S MP protocol. A network element is characterized by having an S MP agent. As a
result, a network element is a managed entity.
1354 RM-PhM hardware configurations
Listed in this section are the operating system requirements for the servers and clients of a
1354 RM-PhM.
Servers
The 1354 RM-PhM server runs on either Windows, Solaris, Solaris x64/x86, or Red Hat
Enterprise Linux.
Clients
The 1354 RM-PhM client runs either Windows, Solaris, Solaris x64/x86, or Red Hat
Enterprise Linux.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
1-2
Overview
1354 RM-PhM communication
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1354 RM-PhM communication
The 1354 RM-PhM uses the S MP management protocol to communicate with the Es.
The 1354 RM-PhM supports S MPv2c and S MPv3 and the following capabilities:
adding and removing new S MP users, changing S MP user passwords, and
enabling/disabling S MP users. (See the 1830 PSS-32 User Provisioning Guide).
ote: The default S MP user cannot be deleted, but can only be disabled.
In normal mode (see 1830 PSS-32 User Provisioning Guide), S MP requests (without
authentication and privacy) are allowed by the E.
ote: The user (admin level) can change the mode from normal to encrypted during
the run time (see 1830 PSS CLI Reference Guide). This will result in an E restart.
1354 RM-PhM release specifications
Listed below are the release specifications for a 1696 ROADM and 1830 PSS network:
•
The 1354 RM-PhM manages only 1696 ROADM and 1830 PSS network elements. It
does not manage the routers or other communications equipment.
•
The recommended maximum number of network elements per 1354 RM-PhM is 250.
The framework is capable of handling much larger networks. These are not
hard-coded limits to the number of network elements; however, the system is only
tested to a network size of 250.
The maximum alarm processing throughput is 1000/sec for 10 second burst.
•
1354 RM-PhM engineering guidelines
The following guidelines can be used to determine the number and location of 1354
RM-PhM servers:
•
•
•
•
•
Ensure each ring is managed by a single 1354 RM-PhM and that no 1354 RM-PhM
manages more than 250 Es.
o more than 100 users are permitted at one time.
Ensure that the communications between each client and the server is at least 10
Mb/sec.
Ensure that the communication link between the server and the network is at least 10
Mb/sec.
If possible, ensure that each client has connectivity to each E. This allows users to
perform cut-thru operations to the Es.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
1-3
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Overview
1354 RM-PhM scaling
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1354 RM-PhM scaling
The 1354 RM-PhM can be scaled to meet demand by considering the following points:
•
•
•
If the server is CPU bound, additional CPUs or faster CPUs may be added. o 1354
RM-PhM upgrades or configuration changes are required.
It is recommended that the 1354 RM-PhM database be installed on a disk that is
separate from the operating system and swap files.
If the server is memory bound, additional memory can be added without
reconfiguration. The server can be reconfigured by re-installing the 1354 RM-PhM
and choosing the upgrade option, or by contacting your customer support
representative.
New features introduced in 1354 RM-PhM R7.0
The following commissioning features are introduced in R7.0
•
DWDM channels from 88 channel plan on PSS- 32 OT pack line ports.
•
•
•
CWDM channels on PSS-32 4DPA4 OT pack line ports.
BW channels on PSS-32 4DPA4 OT pack line ports.
DCM distances supported in planning tool to PhM interface.
•
•
LD OSC port SFP module on 1830 PSS-32.
SFP module on 4DPA4 pack in 1830 PSS-32.
•
•
•
Uni-directional topological connections for 4DPA4 in PSS-32.
PSS-32 packs used for 88 channels: CWR8-88, AHPLG, ITLB, SFD44B
OT packs in PSS-32: 4DPA4, 43STX4
•
sub-rate CIR services on PSS-1 GBE
The following network element administration features are introduced in R7.0
•
•
FTP and SFTP for 1830 PSS-32 R2.0 and beyond
FTP and SFTP for 1830 PSS-1 GBEH R2.0 and beyond
•
•
•
FTP and SFTP for 1830 PSS-1 MD4H R1.0 and beyond
ew password complexity and User ID rules
TFTP or SFTP for R2.0 1830 E database backup and restore
•
•
SSH for CLI and TL1 cut-thru to E
S MPv3 for all S MP communication with E.
•
•
1830 R2.0 E user management provisioning
S MP traps sent by E for system autonomous messages related to security events
are logged by the PhM in the E Event log
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
1-4
Overview
New features introduced in 1354 RM-PhM R7.0
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
•
•
•
S MP traps sent by E for system autonomous messages related to security
conditions are logged by the PhM in the Fault log
Forward S MP trap notifications for alarms generated based on raise and clear
notification traps received from network elements.
PhM management of RED-C Raman and EDFA network elements.
The following inventory features are introduced in R7.0
E Types:
•
–
1830 PSS-1 GBE 1.0
–
1830 PSS-32 2.0
–
1830 PSS-1 GBEH 2.0
– 1830 PSS-1 MD4H 1.0
Card/Shelf support:
– OTU1 on 11STMM10 client ports
– PSS-1 GBE Card
– AHPLG Card (with OSC) - Amplifier High Power Low Gain Card
– CWR8-88 Card - 88 Channel Colorless Wavelength Router Card
– 4DPA4 Card - 4G Dual Port Pluggable AnyRate (4 clients, 2 VOAs) Card
– PSS1 MD4H Card - 4G Dual Port Pluggable AnyRate (4 clients) Card
– 43STX4 Card - 40G Single Port Tunable Multirate Mux (4 universal clients) Card
– ITLB Card - Interleaver Card
– SFD44B Card - Static Filter DWDM 44 Odd Channel Card
– Managed SFD44B Shelf
– Managed ITLB Shelf
•
•
The PhM displays 1830 E channels as frequencies for DWDM and as wavelengths
for CWDM and B&W, not as channel numbers.
Support for 88 DWDM channels
Support for 3 B&W channels (PSS-32, PSS-1)
•
•
Uni-directional Connections
Bi-directional transmission over single fiber
•
•
Hardened ETR (Extended Temperature Range)
OSPF Provisioning
•
Menu items introduced in R7.0
•
•
Topology View: Provision -> OSPF.
Inventory View: Performance Monitoring -> PM Baseline Configuration
•
•
Inventory View: Administration -> OSPF
Physical Topology View: Bi-Connect and Uni-Connect.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
1-5
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Overview
New features introduced in 1354 RM-PhM R7.0
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For new services configurations introduced in R7.0, see the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32
Product Information and Planning Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
1-6
2
System administration
2
Overview
Purpose
This chapter explains how to start and stop the 1354 RM-PhM server and client and how
to backup and restore the database.
Contents
2-3
System requirements
2-3
Interfaces and protocols
2-3
1354 RM-PhM redundant servers
2-6
Installing the 1354 RM-PhM
2-11
2-11
Before you start
2-11
Installing the 1354 RM-PhM on a Linux or Solaris x86/x64 platform
2-12
Installing the 1354 RM-PhM on Windows
2-16
Starting and stopping the server and client
2-22
2-22
1354 RM-PhM server watchdog
2-22
Starting the 1354 RM-PhM server on Linux or Solaris x86/x64
2-23
Stopping the 1354 RM-PhM server on Linux or Solaris x86/x64
2-25
Starting the 1354 RM-PhM server on Microsoft Windows
2-26
Stopping the 1354 RM-PhM server on Microsoft Windows
2-27
Starting a client session
2-28
Stopping a client session
2-31
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-1
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuring the file transfer properties of the 1354 RM-PhM server
2-32
Configuring the TP properties of the 1354 RM-PhM server
2-33
Configuring the TP properties of the network elements
2-34
1354 RM-PhM database backup and restore
2-35
2-35
1354 RM-PhM database backup
2-36
1354 RM-PhM database restore
2-38
Recovering from file corruption without having to restore from a backup
2-39
Performing a server switch-over
2-40
1696 ROADM and 1830 PSS network element database backup and restore
2-41
2-41
Performance Monitoring (PM) Archive Setting
2-44
2-44
S MP Trap Alarm Forwarding
2-46
2-46
RADIUS server and user authentication
2-50
2-50
1354 RM-PhM user management
2-69
2-69
E user management
2-75
2-75
1354 RM-PhM login session settings
2-79
2-79
1696 ROADM and 1830 PSS network element software management
2-82
2-82
1354 RM-PhM management of Red-C RAMA Amplifier & EDFA Booster
2-90
2-90
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-2
System administration
System requirements
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
System requirements
The recommended system requirements for supporting a 1354 RM-PhM server or client
are listed in the release notes which can be obtained from your Alcatel-Lucent
representative.
Interfaces and protocols
The 1354 RM-PhM uses the following protocols and ports. These ports must not be in use
by any other application (such as an S MP daemon).
The 1354 RM-PhM has no northbound interfaces.
The following table lists the protocols and ports used for communications between the
1354 RM-PhM and the network elements.
Table 2-1
1354 RM-PhM to network element protocols and ports
Protocol
Stack
Action
Destination
Port
Source Port
Application
RMI
1354 RM-PhM
client to server
1099,
10999,11000,
11001,11002,
1103
Dynamic
client/server
communication
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-3
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
Interfaces and protocols
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-1
1354 RM-PhM to network element protocols and ports (continued)
Protocol
Stack
Action
Destination
Port
FTP
The 1354 RM-PhM
server acts as a FTP
client to browse the
contents of the E
software server.
20, 21
Source Port
Application
software download,
backup and restore
Can be used to
transfer 1354
RM-PhM files to be
archived on a
remote server. This
can be performed
with:
•
database
backup files
•
archived log
file
•
exported
service
configuration
files
•
exported LPT
network
configuration
files
S MP(v2c)/ Request from 1354
RM-PhM
UDP/IP
S MP (V3)
HTTP/
TCP/IP
161
Dynamic
Reply from E
Same as
request
source
161
Traps from E
162
161
Request from 1354
RM-PhM
161
Dynamic
Reply from E
Same as
request
source
161
Traps from E
162
161
Request from 1354
RM-PhM client
80
Dynamic
E /server
communication
Secure E /server
communication
Web interface cut-thru
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-4
System administration
Interfaces and protocols
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-1
Protocol
Stack
HTTPS/
TCP/IP
Telnet/
TCP/IP
TL1/
TCP/IP
TL1/Telnet/
TCP/IP
TFTP/
UDP/IP
TP/
UDP/IP
1354 RM-PhM to network element protocols and ports (continued)
Action
Destination
Port
Source Port
Reply from E
Same as
request
source
80
Request from 1354
RM-PhM client
5960
Dynamic
Reply from 1354
RM-PhM server
Same as
request
source
5960
Request from 1354
RM-PhM client
23
Dynamic
Reply from E
Same as
request
source
23
Request from 1354
RM-PhM client
3082
Dynamic
Reply from E
Same as
request
source
3082
Request from 1354
RM-PhM client
3083
Dynamic
Reply from E
Same as
request
source
3083
Request from E
69
Dynamic
Reply from
software download
or backup and
restore server
Same as
request
source
69
Request from E or
1354 RM-PhM
server
123
Dynamic
Reply from TP
server
Same as
request
source
123
Application
Web server
CLI cut-thru
TL1 socket
TL1 cut-thru
software download,
backup and restore, PM
transfer
time and
synchronization
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-5
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
Interfaces and protocols
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Telcordia™ NMA®/Transport to network element protocols and ports
The following table lists the protocols and ports used for communications between
Telcordia MA/Transport and Es.
All communication between Telcordia MA or Transport and the Es uses:
•
TCP/IP protocol
•
•
the DC IP addresses of the gateway Es.
application level TCP gateways to reach non-gateway Es
Table 2-2
NMA/Transport to GNE protocols and ports
Protocol Stack
Action
Destination Port
Source Port
TL1/TCP/IP
Request from 1354
RM-PhM
3082
Dynamic
Reply from E
Same as request
source
3082
Request from 1354
RM-PhM
3083
Dynamic
Reply from E
Same as request
source
3083
TL1/Telnet/TCP/IP
1354 RM-PhM redundant servers
The 1354 RM-PhM can be configured with redundant servers to protect against server
failure. Server redundancy is an option that is specified during the installation of the 1354
RM-PhM server software.
A 1354 RM-PhM redundant server system consists of two 1354 RM-PhM servers running
on two separate computers, as seen in the following figure.
Figure 2-1 1354 RM-PhM redundant servers
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-6
System administration
1354 RM-PhM redundant servers
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
At a given moment, one of the pair is designated as the active server and the other as the
standby server. Only the active server communicates with the network elements and the
1354 RM-PhM clients. Each server has its own local copy of the 1354 RM-PhM database.
Database changes to the active database are replicated immediately to the standby
database.
To view the current state of server redundancy, choose Admin>EMS Status.
Terminology notes:
•
•
The active server is the one that currently has control of the network and is
communicating to the network elements. When a 1354 RM-PhM redundancy switch
occurs, the other server becomes the active. 1354 RM-PhM server switching is not
revertive, meaning the servers do not automatically return to their original designation
of active and standby. An active server remains as active until a manual or automatic
switch occurs.
When installing each 1354 RM-PhM server in a redundant pair, the user is asked to
supply a “Server ID” for that server. This can be either the number “1” or the number
“2”. You can specify either Server ID to either server as long as a different Server ID
is used for each server. The choice of the Server ID value has no effect on which
server becomes active or standby. When installing a redundant pair of servers, the
server that comes up first becomes active.
When a redundant 1354 RM-PhM server starts up, it is initially in the standby state.
When the server has finished initializing itself, it attempts to communicate with its
redundant mate. If it finds that the mate is already in the active state it then remains as
standby. If the mate is also in the standby state then a challenge mechanism is used to
designate one of the pair as the sole active server and the other to remain as standby. If a
server cannot communicate with its mate, it becomes active.
Due to network or configuration problems, it may occur that both servers become active.
A common scenario for this is when the network cable for one of the servers is removed.
This interrupts the communication of each server with its mate so that they then both
assert that they are active. When normal communications are restored, the servers
recognize the situation and elect one server as the active, and the other becomes standby.
This process is called the “Active Challenge” and proceeds as follows:
1. Each server determines the number of network elements that it is connected to. The
one with the higher number becomes active. If the number is the same then:
2. Each server determines the number of active user sessions. The one with the higher
number becomes active. If the number is the same then:
3. The server whose name alphabetically proceeds the other becomes active.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-7
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
1354 RM-PhM redundant servers
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 1354 RM-PhM servers communicate for the purpose of redundancy at two levels:
•
server-to-server heartbeat - every 15 seconds (configurable), each 1354 RM-PhM
server communicates via TCP/IP with its mate to determine the mate's state and to
determine if a state change is warranted. By default, a standby server becomes active
if two heartbeats are missed.
•
database replication - changes to the active server's database are replicated to the
standby server's database.
Server switch-over occurs when the standby server loses communication with the active
server. Communications loss can occur because the active server has gone down, or
because the communication link between the two servers has failed. On switch-over to
active, the server registers itself as a trap destination for all network elements. All client
sessions on the former active server are shut down. Client sessions must be manually
restarted and are directed automatically to the new active server.
On switch-over to standby, the server de-registers itself as a trap destination with all
network elements.
Server switch-over can be manually initiated by choosing Admin>EMS Status, and
clicking the Switch button.
Managing redundant servers
To view and manage redundant servers, in the 1354 RM-PhM choose Admin>EMS
Status. The following window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-8
System administration
1354 RM-PhM redundant servers
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-2 EMS Status window
The fields relating to servers and redundancy are:
•
•
Active Server - the server that is currently acting as the active server
Standby Server - the server that is currently acting as the standby server
•
Server Configuration - the valid values are:
– stand-alone - for a server that is not configured to be redundant
– Redundant - ACTIVE - indicating that this is the active server in a redundant pair
Server Synchronization State - indicates whether the last heartbeat to the standby
server was successful. If the state is “Synchronized” then the field's background is
green. Otherwise, it is red. If this field is red then the active server is unable to
communicate with the standby 1354 RM-PhM application. Verify that:
– the 1354 RM-PhM is running and operational on the standby server
– communication is possible between the active and standby servers
•
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-9
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
1354 RM-PhM redundant servers
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
–
–
•
Database Synchronization State (Active to Standby) - indicates whether the database
replication is operating correctly to propagate changes in the database of the active
server to the database of the standby server. If the state is “Synchronized” then the
field's background is green. Otherwise, it is red. If this field is red then the active
server's database is unable to communicate with the database of the standby 1354
RM-PhM. Verify that:
–
–
•
the standby server is installed as a redundant server with the active server
Try to log into the 1354 RM-PhM application using the 1354 RM-PhM client. If
you can log in successfully then it indicates that both servers are acting a active
since neither can complete a heartbeat to the other. Verify that communications are
operational in both directions between the servers.
The SSH tunnel from the active server to the standby server is installed and
operational.
If the condition persists then perform a “Database Sync”.
Database Synchronization State (Standby to Active) - indicates whether the database
replication mechanism is operating correctly to propagate changes from the database
of the server currently acting standby server to the database of the active server. This
is important because if a switch was to occur then the current standby server would
become active. If the state is “Synchronized” then the field's background is green.
Otherwise, it is red. Verify that:
– The SSH tunnel from the standby server to the active server is installed and
operational.
– If the condition persists then perform a “Database Sync”.
The following actions can be performed:
•
Back up Database - create a file on the server containing the database contents. See
“1354 RM-PhM database backup” (p. 2-36) for information about 1354 RM-PhM
database backup and “1354 RM-PhM database restore” (p. 2-38) for information
about 1354 RM-PhM database restore.
•
Switch - to cause the database that is currently active to become standby and the
current standby to become the new active server. If the standby is not able to become
active then the original active becomes active once more.
Server Shutdown - shut down the server that is currently active. If it is online and
operational, the standby becomes active.
•
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-10
System administration
Installing the 1354 RM-PhM
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Installing the 1354 RM-PhM
The 1354 RM-PhM is installed by an install “wizard” which guides you through the
process and prompts you for input as necessary. The files required for installation are
transferred to your computer through the file transfer protocol (FTP), or delivered on a
DVD. Contact your service representative for the FTP site and user ID and password or
for the DVD. This section covers the following procedures:
•
•
“Installing the 1354 RM-PhM on a Linux or Solaris x86/x64 platform” (p. 2-12)
“Installing the 1354 RM-PhM on Windows” (p. 2-16)
Before you start
For Solaris systems, install the latest “Recommended Solaris Patch Cluster” which can be
found at:
http://sunsolve.sun.com.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-11
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
Installing the 1354 RM-PhM
Installing the 1354 RM-PhM on a Linux or Solaris x86/x64
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
platform
Installing the 1354 RM-PhM on a Linux or Solaris x86/x64
platform
In this release, the 1354 RM-PhM can run on either of the following platforms:
•
•
Solaris x64/x86
Linux
There is a single installation package for the 1354 RM-PhM on Linux or Solaris x86/x64
platforms that installs either the 1354 RM-PhM server (includes the server and client
software), or only the client software. The installer asks the user to select the desired
installation.
Before installing the 1354 RM-PhM, perform the following tasks as necessary:
•
create account roles as required
To install 1354 RM-PhM on Linux or Solaris x86/x64
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Log in as the root user.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Ensure that the /etc/hosts file on the PhM server machine has a separate line containing
the primary physical interface and the hostname of the machine. Otherwise, the PhM
server will not be listening on the correct port to receive client connections from remote
machines (a local client will still be able to login to the server but not a remote one).
For example, if the PhM server hostname is 1830sim07, the following line: 127.0.0.1
localhost.localdomain localhost 1830sim07 must be changed to:
127.0.0.1 localhost.localdomain localhost
10.3.2.7 1830sim07
in the /etc/hosts file
Here, the physical interface (10.3.2.7) is identified with the hostname on a separate line in
the file.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
If you are installing from files that have been FTPed to your system, change directory to
the directory where the installation files have been FTPed, and ensure that the file
setup.sh is executable.
If you are installing from a DVD, copy installation files from the DVD to a directory on
the hard drive. After that, change directory to the directory where the installation files
have been copied, and ensure that the file setup.sh is executable.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-12
System administration
Installing the 1354 RM-PhM
Installing the 1354 RM-PhM on a Linux or Solaris x86/x64
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
platform
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
Set the DISPLAY environment variable to the name of the machine on which you are
working.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
Execute the setup.bin file. Type:
cd<cdrom> (directory where the cd is located - this may be /cdrom or /
media/cdrom)
cd PhM
ote: For Solaris x86 this command is: cd phm
cd linux (or cd solarisx86)
sh setup.sh
The installation wizard starts up and guides you through the installation procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6
It is recommended that you accept all of the defaults suggested by the installation wizard,
however, you can customize the following items when prompted.
•
the directory into which to install the 1354 RM-PhM (Do not include a space in the
installation directory name or else the installation fails.)
•
•
•
user name and group name to own the installed files
perform a new installation (which removes all existing data) or an upgrade (which
preserves existing data)
install a stand-alone server or redundant servers
•
•
select the file transfer protocol
specify the TFTP root directory
•
choose whether or not to display a banner at login time
ote: On Linux, the user is not given the option to choose whether or not to display a
banner at login time.
ote: If displayed, the user must press “y” or “yes” (not case sensitive) and the enter
key to acknowledge the logon banner before being able to continue with their session.
The login banner then displays a message indicating that unauthorized access is
prohibited.
•
If applicable, specify the “Use EMS Administrator Role”.
When all options have been specified, the installation wizard copies the 1354 RM-PhM
files into the specified directory.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7
When prompted, click Finish.
The installation wizard exits.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-13
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
Installing the 1354 RM-PhM
Installing the 1354 RM-PhM on a Linux or Solaris x86/x64
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
platform
To upgrade the 1354 RM-PhM on Linux or Solaris x86/x64
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
The 1354 RM-PhM upgrade procedure is the same as the installation procedure, except
that you choose the upgrade option instead of the new installation option. You do not need
to uninstall the 1354 RM-PhM to upgrade. The upgrade backs up the existing installation
files.
E....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To cancel or back out from a 1354 RM-PhM upgrade on Linux or Solaris x86/x64
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
You can safely cancel a 1354 RM-PhM upgrade at any time during the upgrade up to and
including the window in the following illustration.
Figure 2-3 1354 RM-PhM installation wizard - last chance to cancel
If you click Cancel in this window, or in any previous window, the installation wizard
exits and you can continue to safely use the existing version of the 1354 RM-PhM.
If you click ext in this window, the installation wizard begins to overwrite the existing
1354 RM-PhM with the new version.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-14
System administration
Installing the 1354 RM-PhM
Installing the 1354 RM-PhM on a Linux or Solaris x86/x64
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
platform
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Begin a new 1354 RM-PhM installation using the installation files/DVD of the previous
version.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
When prompted to choose between a ew Installation and an Upgrade, choose ew
Installation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
After the installation has completed, stop the EMS server.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
Restore the EMS database from the backup file in
install_dir_backup2/bin/mysql/data/tropxnmsBackup.sql. For example:
1. cd /opt/PhM_backup2/bin
ote: For Solaris x86 this command is: cd /opt/phm_backup2/bin
2. ./dbrestore.sh ../mysql/data/tropxnmsBackup.sql
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6
Start the EMS server.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To uninstall the 1354 RM-PhM on Linux or Solaris x86/x64
In normal situations, this procedure should never be needed. The 1354 RM-PhM
installation procedure can perform an upgrade to, or an overwrite of, the existing version
of the 1354 RM-PhM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Log in as the root user.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Execute install_dir/uninstall.sh
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
After the uninstall wizard is finished, manually delete all remaining files from the
installation directory.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-15
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
Installing the 1354 RM-PhM
Installing the 1354 RM-PhM on Windows
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Installing the 1354 RM-PhM on Windows
Attention: To install the 1354 RM-PhM on Windows, there must be a DVD drive in
the install PC.
There are two installation packages for the 1354 RM-PhM on Windows. One package
installs the 1354 RM-PhM server, which includes the server and client software, and one
package installs only the client software.
The server/client installation package also installs TFTP server software. Before installing
the server/client package, check to see if there is already a TFTP server application
running on the server. If there is, have your system administrator remove it so that there is
no conflict when the 1354 RM-PhM server is installed.
Before installing the 1354 RM-PhM ensure that the installation files are in a location that
can be accessed from the computer on which the 1354 RM-PhM is to be installed.
To install the 1354 RM-PhM server on Windows
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Log in as a user that is a member of the Windows Administrator group.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
If you are installing from a DVD, skip this step. If you are installing from files that have
been FTPed to your system, change directory to the directory where the installation files
have been FTPed. Ensure that you FTP the directories “windows” and “common” and
choose the correct installation directory for the type of installation that you want to
perform.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Execute windows/setup.exe.
The installation wizard starts up and guides you through the installation procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
It is recommended that you accept all of the defaults suggested by the installation wizard,
however, you can customize the following items when prompted.
•
•
the directory into which to install the 1354 RM-PhM
perform a new installation (which removes all existing data) or an upgrade (which
preserves existing data)
•
•
•
install a stand-alone server or a redundant server pair
select the file transfer protocol
specify the TFTP root directory
When all options have been specified, the installation wizard copies the 1354 RM-PhM
files into the specified directory.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-16
System administration
Installing the 1354 RM-PhM
Installing the 1354 RM-PhM on Windows
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
When prompted, click Finish.
The installation wizard exits.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To install the 1354 RM-PhM client on Windows
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Log in as a user that is a member of the Windows Administrator group.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
If you are installing from files that have been FTPed to your system, change directory to
the directory where the installation files have been FTPed. Ensure that you choose the
correct installation directory for the type of installation that you want to perform, either
server and client, or client only.
If you are installing from a DVD, skip this step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Execute the windows_client.exe file.
The installation wizard starts up and guides you through the installation procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
It is recommended that you accept all of the defaults suggested by the installation wizard,
however, you can customize the following items when prompted.
•
the directory into which to install the 1354 RM-PhM
•
perform a new installation (which removes all existing data) or an upgrade (which
preserves existing data)
When all options have been specified, the installation wizard copies the 1354 RM-PhM
files into the specified directory.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
When prompted, click Finish.
The installation wizard exits.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-17
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
Installing the 1354 RM-PhM
Installing the 1354 RM-PhM on Windows
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To install the 1354 RM-PhM client on Windows using a web browser
You can install a 1354 RM-PhM client by accessing the installation files on the server via
the web.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Configure your internet browser to retrieve the latest version of the 1354 RM-PhM web
page and client installer. In the Microsoft Internet Explorer browser, perform the
following steps:
1. Choose Tools>Internet Options....
2. In the box labeled Temporary Internet Files, click on Settings....
3. In the options for Check for newer versions of stored pages:, choose either
• Every visit to the page, or
• Automatically (this is the default setting and is recommended).
4. Click the OK button on the Settings window.
5. Click the OK button on the Internet Options window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
On the client machine, log in as a user that is a member of the Windows Administrator
group.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Launch Internet Explorer.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
In the address field, type:
http://server_name:5960/global/
where server_name is the name of the server on which the 1354 RM-PhM is installed.
The 1354 RM-PhM web page is launched.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
On the web page click Install/Upgrade EMS client.
Follow the instructions that are displayed in the web page and in the installation wizard
that is launched.
E....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-18
System administration
Installing the 1354 RM-PhM
Installing the 1354 RM-PhM on Windows
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To upgrade the 1354 RM-PhM server on Windows
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
The 1354 RM-PhM upgrade procedure is the same as the installation procedure, except
that you choose the upgrade option instead of the new installation option. You do not need
to uninstall the 1354 RM-PhM to upgrade. The upgrade backs up the existing installation
files.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To upgrade the 1354 RM-PhM client on Windows
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
There are two methods by which the client can be upgraded:
•
•
manual - The manual 1354 RM-PhM client upgrade procedure is the same as the
installation procedure, except that you choose the upgrade option instead of the new
installation option. You do not need to uninstall the 1354 RM-PhM to upgrade. The
upgrade backs up the existing installation files.
automatic - The automatic method occurs when the client recognizes that it is not at
the same version as the server. The client shuts down and then an upgrade wizard
launches and guides you through the upgrade.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To cancel or back out from a 1354 RM-PhM upgrade on Windows
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
You can safely cancel a 1354 RM-PhM upgrade at any time during the upgrade up to and
including the window in the following illustration.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-19
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
Installing the 1354 RM-PhM
Installing the 1354 RM-PhM on Windows
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-4 1354 RM-PhM installation wizard - last chance to cancel
If you click Cancel in this window, or in any previous window, the installation wizard
exits and you can continue to safely use the existing version of the 1354 RM-PhM.
If you click ext in this window, the installation wizard begins to overwrite the existing
1354 RM-PhM with the new version.
E....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To uninstall the 1354 RM-PhM on Windows
ote: Before performing this procedure, shut down the EMS client, if it is running.
In normal situations, this procedure should never be needed. The 1354 RM-PhM
installation procedure can perform an upgrade to, or an overwrite of, the existing version
of the 1354 RM-PhM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Log in as a user that is a member of the Windows Administrator group.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Shut down all 1354 RM-PhM clients that are running.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-20
System administration
Installing the 1354 RM-PhM
Installing the 1354 RM-PhM on Windows
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Use the 1354 RM-PhM uninstall wizard.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
Once the uninstall wizard is finished, restart Windows.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-21
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
Starting and stopping the server and client
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Starting and stopping the server and client
This section describes server startup and shutdown on the 1354 RM-PhM. It covers the
following procedures:
•
•
•
•
“Starting the 1354 RM-PhM server on Linux or Solaris x86/x64” (p. 2-23)
•
•
“Starting a client session” (p. 2-28)
“Stopping a client session” (p. 2-31)
“Stopping the 1354 RM-PhM server on Linux or Solaris x86/x64” (p. 2-25)
“Starting the 1354 RM-PhM server on Microsoft Windows” (p. 2-26)
“Stopping the 1354 RM-PhM server on Microsoft Windows” (p. 2-27)
1354 RM-PhM server watchdog
The 1354 RM-PhM server watchdog monitors the status of the 1354 RM-PhM server on
both the Linux or Solaris x86/x64 and Windows platforms. If the 1354 RM-PhM server
stops unexpectedly or becomes unresponsive, then the watchdog shuts it down and then
restarts it. The 1354 RM-PhM server watchdog is installed with the 1354 RM-PhM server
software and is started automatically. It runs continuously in the background.
The 1354 RM-PhM server watchdog does not affect the 1354 RM-PhM client.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-22
System administration
Starting and stopping the server and client
Starting the 1354 RM-PhM server on Linux or Solaris
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
x86/x64
Starting the 1354 RM-PhM server on Linux or Solaris x86/x64
The 1354 RM-PhM server consists of the Element Management Server (EMS) and
MySQL database. The 1354 RM-PhM server is started automatically when the Linux or
Solaris x86/x64 host on which it resides is rebooted. The EMS and MySQL database are
started automatically as part of the system startup. Startup messages can be viewed in file
/var/adm/messages. Look for mysql.server and ems.server entries.
To manually start the 1354 RM-PhM server or any of its components, use the following
procedures.
ote: Using a Linux window manager, you can control the 1354 RM-PhM services
like other services using the commands in Linux. For example, in gnome go to
System>Administration>Server Settings>Services and you will see mysql and ems in
the list of background services.
The Linux commands are:
•
•
service ems start
service ems stop
•
•
service ems restart
service ems status
•
•
•
service mysql start
service mysql stop
service mysql restart
•
service mysql status
You can still start and stop ems and mysql using the scripts in /etc/init.d (see below):
“To start the database” (p. 2-23) ,“To start the EMS” (p. 2-24), “To stop the EMS”
(p. 2-25), and “To stop the database” (p. 2-25).
To start the database
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Log in as the root user.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
At the command line type:
/etc/init.d/mysql start
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-23
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
Starting and stopping the server and client
Starting the 1354 RM-PhM server on Linux or Solaris
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
x86/x64
To start the EMS
Before you start the EMS, the database must be started first.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Log in as the root user.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
To start the EMS, at the command line type:
/etc/init.d/ems start
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-24
System administration
Starting and stopping the server and client
Stopping the 1354 RM-PhM server on Linux or Solaris
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
x86/x64
Stopping the 1354 RM-PhM server on Linux or Solaris x86/x64
The procedures in this section should be performed only by a system administrator.
To stop the EMS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Log in as the root user.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
At the command line type:
/etc/init.d/ems stop
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To stop the database
To stop the database, the EMS must be stopped first.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Log in as the root user.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
At the command line type:
/etc/init.d/mysql stop
ote: For detailed information on administering the server database, launch a browser
and go to www.mysql.com.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-25
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
Starting and stopping the server and client
Starting the 1354 RM-PhM server on Microsoft Windows
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Starting the 1354 RM-PhM server on Microsoft Windows
To perform these procedures you must be logged in as an administrator, or as a member
of the Power Users group.
To start the database
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
The database is installed as a network service, and is started automatically when the
machine starts.
If the database is stopped, it can be restarted manually. In a cmd.exe window, type:
net start mysql
E....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To start the EMS
To start the EMS, the database must be started first.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
To run the EMS as a service, in a cmd.exe window, type:
net start ems
To run the EMS as a process, in a cmd.exe window, type:
cd installdir\bin
where installdir is the installation directory (C:\Program Files\PhM).
Type:
ems
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-26
System administration
Starting and stopping the server and client
Stopping the 1354 RM-PhM server on Microsoft Windows
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Stopping the 1354 RM-PhM server on Microsoft Windows
To perform these procedures you must be logged in as an administrator, or as a member
of the Power Users group.
To stop the EMS
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
There are several methods to stop the EMS:
1. If the EMS is running as a service, in a cmd.exe window, type:
net stop ems
2. From the 1354 RM-PhM Management Control Panel (MCP), choose Admin>EMS
Status, and then click the Server Shutdown button.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To stop the database
To stop the database, the EMS must be stopped first.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
In a cmd.exe window, type:
net stop mysql
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-27
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
Starting and stopping the server and client
Starting a client session
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Starting a client session
The 1354 RM-PhM client consists of the Management Control Panel (MCP). Under
normal operating conditions, it should take less than 30 seconds for the client to start up.
It is recommended that you run only one client session on the 1354 RM-PhM server
machine at a time.
To start a client session on Linux or Solaris x86/x64
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
At the command line type:
cd installdir/bin
where installdir is the installation directory (opt/Phm).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Start the client by typing:
mcp
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Log into the 1354 RM-PhM.
If this is the first login after a new installation, log into the 1354 RM-PhM as an admin
user. Obtain the password from your customer support representative. You should change
the password provided to a new one as soon as possible (see “Password Rules” table
below).
ote: If a user tries to log in six times in a row with the same user name but wrong
password, their account is locked, and can be unlocked only by an administrator.
Password Rules
Password allowable characters:
•
Lowercase alphabetic characters in the set [a-z]
•
Uppercase alphabetic characters in the set [A-Z]
•
•
umeric characters in the set [0-9]
Special characters: !(exclamation), @(at), # (pound), $ (dollar), %(percent), ^(caret),
&(ampersand), * (star), ( (left bracket), ) (right bracket), _(underscore), +(plus)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-28
System administration
Starting and stopping the server and client
Starting a client session
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Password complexity:
•
A password must start with an alphabetic character
•
A password is a string consisting of a minimum of 6 and a maximum of 32 alphabetic,
numeric, or special characters
•
A password must have at least 1 numeric digit [0-9] not in the first or last position.
•
The same character cannot repeat more than 3 times consecutively
•
It must not contain the associated userid or its reverse
The 1354 RM-PhM user account password complexity rules are configurable. This is done by
editing the file ems.xml. Below are the properties and their default values:
•
<property name="lumos.scontainer.sec.MinPasswordLength" value="6" />
•
<property name="lumos.scontainer.sec.Min umberOfUppercase" value="0" />
•
<property name="lumos.scontainer.sec.Min umberOfLowercase" value="0" />
•
<property name="lumos.scontainer.sec.Min umberOf umeric" value="1" />
•
<property name="lumos.scontainer.sec.Min umberOfSpecial" value="0" />
•
<property name="lumos.scontainer.sec.Min umberOfRepeatingChars" value="3" />
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To start a client session on Windows
A client session can be run on the 1354 RM-PhM server machine, but it is recommended
that you run only one client session on the 1354 RM-PhM server machine at a time.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
There are two methods to start a client session:
1. Click the Windows Start button, and choose, 1354 RM-PhM>Client.
or:
2. In a cmd.exe window, type:
cd installdir\bin
where installdir is the installation directory (C:\Program Files\PhM.
Type:
mcp
You are prompted to enter a username and hostname.
To start the client session and log output to the console window, type:
sh_mcp
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Log into the 1354 RM-PhM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-29
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
Starting and stopping the server and client
Starting a client session
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If this is the first login after a new installation, log into the 1354 RM-PhM as an admin
user. Obtain the password from your customer support representative. You should change
the password provided to a new one as soon as possible (see “Password Rules” table in
previous procedure).
ote: If a user tries to log in six times in a row with the same user name but wrong
password, their account is locked, and can be unlocked only by an administrator.
Once you log in, you may see the following window:
Figure 2-5 Security alert dialog
If you see this window, click Keep Blocking.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-30
System administration
Starting and stopping the server and client
Stopping a client session
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Stopping a client session
To log out of a client session
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Close the main client window, or in the 1354 RM-PhM, choose File > Exit.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-31
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
Starting and stopping the server and client
Configuring the file transfer properties of the 1354
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RM-PhM server
Configuring the file transfer properties of the 1354 RM-PhM
server
Use this procedure to specify the file transfer properties of the 1354 RM-PhM server:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
From the 1354 RM-PhM Topology View, choose Admin > Settings.
The Settings window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
To view/change file transfer properties, click the System Settings tab, then the File
Transfer tab.
The file transfer properties are displayed, showing the current settings, and providing an
area to change the settings.
Make changes to the properties as desired. Any changes that you make do not take effect
until the 1354 RM-PhM server is restarted. Specify the TFTP root directory.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Click OK to save the changes and close the window. Click Cancel to close the window
without saving changes.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-32
System administration
Starting and stopping the server and client
Configuring the NTP properties of the 1354 RM-PhM server
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuring the NTP properties of the 1354 RM-PhM server
Use this procedure to specify whether the Es can use this server as an TP server. This
option causes network elements that are discovered by the 1354 RM-PhM to add the 1354
RM-PhM server address to their TP servers list. This option does not install an TP
server onto the 1354 RM-PhM server machine, nor does it check to see if there is a valid
TP server already installed. To install and activate an TP server on the 1354 RM-PhM
server machine, contact your system administrator.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
From the 1354 RM-PhM Topology View, choose Admin > Settings.
The Settings window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Click the System Settings tab, then the TP tab.
The TP properties are displayed, showing the current setting. To change the setting,
check or uncheck the Use this server as the TP server check box.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Click OK to save the changes and close the window. Click Cancel to close the window
without saving changes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
Changes to the TP properties do not take effect until after the 1354 RM-PhM server has
been restarted. To restart the 1354 RM-PhM server, refer to “Starting and stopping the
server and client” (p. 2-22)
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-33
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
Starting and stopping the server and client
Configuring the NTP properties of the network elements
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuring the NTP properties of the network elements
Use this procedure to specify the TP servers for the Es.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
From the 1354 RM-PhM Topology view, select the network element(s) for which you
want to specify TP properties software, and choose Admin> E TP Table.
The E TP Settings window is displayed, with the selected network element(s) listed.
Alternatively, if you select no network elements in the topology view, the E TP
Settings window lists all of the network elements.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
In the list of Es, select the E(s) for which you want to specify TP settings, and then
click the magnifying-glass icon.
The TP Details window for the selected E(s) is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Add or remove an TP server for the selected E(s).
•
To add an TP server, click Add Server.
In the pop-up box, specify the IP address of the desired TP server, and then click
OK.
To add the TP server on the 1354 RM-PhM server, click Add EMS as TP Server.
•
To delete an TP server, select the server in the list and click Remove Server.
•
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
Click OK to save the changes and close the window. Click Cancel to close the window
without saving changes.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-34
System administration
1354 RM-PhM database backup and restore
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1354 RM-PhM database backup and restore
This section provides procedures for backing up and restoring the 1354 RM-PhM
database on Linux or Solaris x86/x64 or Windows. The 1354 RM-PhM uses a MySQL
database.
For information on the MySQL database, and tools and commands for administering the
MySQL database, launch a browser and go to www.mysql.com.
This sections covers the following:
•
•
•
“1354 RM-PhM database backup” (p. 2-36)
“1354 RM-PhM database restore” (p. 2-38)
“Recovering from file corruption without having to restore from a backup” (p. 2-39)
•
•
“Performing a server switch-over” (p. 2-40)
“1696 ROADM and 1830 PSS network element database backup and restore”
(p. 2-41)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-35
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
1354 RM-PhM database backup and restore
1354 RM-PhM database backup
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1354 RM-PhM database backup
Use the following procedure to back up a database on either Linux or Solaris x86/x64 or
Windows.
To back up the 1354 RM-PhM database
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
From the 1354 RM-PhM, choose Admin>EMS Status.
The EMS Status window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Click the Back up Database button.
The database is backed-up according to the default attributes (see “To configure 1354
RM-PhM database backup attributes” (p. 2-36)).
E....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To configure 1354 RM-PhM database backup attributes
Use this procedure to specify where to put 1354 RM-PhM database backup files, and to
schedule recurring backups.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
From the 1354 RM-PhM, choose Admin>Settings.
The 1354 RM-PhM Settings window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Select the System Settings tab and click the 1354 Database Backup tab.
The database backup attributes are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Specify the backup directory. Click the folder icon and choose a directory from the
drop-down list. Click Select.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
Specify the maximum number of backups to perform by adjusting the Maximum umber
of Backups slider bar. By sliding it all the way to the left, the maximum number of
backups is set to unlimited.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
To turn on scheduled backups, check the “Enable scheduled backup of the server
database” check box.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-36
System administration
1354 RM-PhM database backup and restore
1354 RM-PhM database backup
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6
To edit the backup schedule, check the “Change backup schedule” check box, and then
specify the days and time that backups are to be performed.
To specify the current time, click the ow button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7
Click OK.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-37
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
1354 RM-PhM database backup and restore
1354 RM-PhM database restore
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1354 RM-PhM database restore
Use the following procedure to restore a database for a server on either Linux or Solaris
x86/x64 or Windows.
ote: Before performing a database restore, shut down the EMS on both servers (in a
redundant configuration), but leave the database running. To shut down the EMS see
“Stopping the 1354 RM-PhM server on Linux or Solaris x86/x64” (p. 2-25) or
“Stopping the 1354 RM-PhM server on Microsoft Windows” (p. 2-27).
To restore the database on a stand-alone or active server
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Stop the EMS on the server you wish to restore.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
From the install_dir/bin directory, run:
for Windows, dbrestore.batbackup_path_and_filename
for Linux or Solaris x86/x64, dbrestore.shbackup_path_and_filename
where backup_path_and_filename is the path to and name of the file from which to
restore.
Example for Windows:
cd "C:\Program Files\PhM\bin"
.\dbrestore.bat backup-file.sql
Example for Linux or Solaris x86/x64:
cd /opt/Phm/bin
./dbrestore.sh backup-file.sql
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
If this is a redundant server configuration, after the database is restored, synchronize the
servers' databases by executing:
On Linux or Solaris x86/x64 - ./tropxadmin.sh synctoprimaryotherserver
- where otherserver is the server that did not get restored in the previous step.
On Windows - tropxadmin.bat synctoprimaryotherserver
- where otherserver is the server that did not get restored in the previous step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
Restart the EMS on both servers (in a redundant configuration).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-38
System administration
1354 RM-PhM database backup and restore
1354 RM-PhM database restore
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
Ensure that the 1354 RM-PhM has discovered all of the Es. For Es that are not
automatically rediscovered, manually rediscover them.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Recovering from file corruption without having to restore
from a backup
The file system can become corrupted if the server is not shut down properly, such as in a
power failure, or due to hardware failure. If the system is Linux or Solaris x86/x64-based,
your system administrator can perform a fsck: fsck -y. On windows your system
administrator can perform a scandisk.
If your EMS server cannot communicate with its database, you get errors in the EMS
trace log (/opt/Phm/log/ems_trace.log) such as “General error: Got error 127 from table
handler; nested exception is: java.sql.SQLException: General error: Got error 127 from
table handler”. This indicates database file corruption. Contact your service
representative.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-39
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
1354 RM-PhM database backup and restore
Performing a server switch-over
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Performing a server switch-over
Use this procedure to cause the standby server to become the active server. Before
performing a server activity switch, the system checks to ensure that the standby server is
in service and capable of becoming the active server. If the standby server is capable, the
switch-over is performed. If the switch-over is not capable, the switch-over is not
performed. When the servers switch activity, the following actions occur:
•
•
•
•
•
The standby server becomes the active and the original active becomes standby, as
verified by using the Admin>EMS Status window to view the server status on both
servers.
The new active server registers with each network elements as a trap destination.
The original active server unregisters itself as trap destination on all network
elements.
Database updates made to the new active server are replicated to the standby server.
MCP clients are logged out of the original active server and must be manually
restarted on the new active server.
To perform a server switch-over using the MCP
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
In the 1354 RM-PhM, choose Admin>EMS Status.
The EMS Status window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Click the Switch button.
The servers switch activity.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-40
System administration
1696 ROADM and 1830 PSS network element database
backup and restore
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1696 ROADM and 1830 PSS network element
database backup and restore
The 1354 RM-PhM network element database backup and restore facility allows you to
backup and restore the database of 1696 ROADM and 1830 PSS network elements that
are being managed by the 1354 RM-PhM.
Before you perform a network element database backup or restore, you need to specify
the attributes which the 1354 RM-PhM uses to perform the action.
To back up a network element database
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
From the 1354 RM-PhM, select the network element(s) that you want to back up.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Choose Maintenance> E Database Backup and Restore.
The Backup and Restore window is displayed with the selected network element(s) listed
along with its (their) attributes. If no network elements were selected, all of them are
listed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
If necessary, edit the backup attributes. Repeat this for each network element.
1. Select the network element and click the magnifying glass icon.
The Backup Properties window is displayed.
2. Specify the file transfer protocol to be used.
3. Specify the backup server. If you wish to use the 1354 RM-PhM server as the backup
host, check the “Use this EMS Server As Backup Host check box.”. This is the
recommended option.
If the backup server is on machine other than the 1354 RM-PhM server, make sure the
check box is unchecked, and then specify the Backup Host IP Address of the server
where the backup file is to be stored.
4. Specify the user settings. If you wish to use the default user settings, check the Use
Default User Settings check box. This is the recommended option.
If you wish to use different user settings from the default, uncheck the check box, and
specify the following attributes:
• Backup File Transfer User Id
•
•
•
Backup File Transfer Password
TFTP root directory
E backup root directory
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-41
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
1696 ROADM and 1830 PSS network element database
backup and restore
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
5. Specify the backup directory. If you wish to use the default settings, check the Use
Default Backup Directory check box. This is the recommended option.
If you wish to specify a different backup directory path from the default, uncheck the
check box, and specify the desired backup directory in the Backup Directory field.
6. Click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
To start the backup, select the network element(s) to be backed up and click
Action>Backup or click the Backup icon.
The 1354 RM-PhM initiates the backup and provides status and progress feedback in the
lower pane of the Backup and Restore window.
The backup file is stored in the specified directory with a filename in the form of:
E ame_SoftwareGenericIdentifier_YYYY-MM-DDD_HH-MM-SS.bak
For example:
E001_01AAA-V-04.00-111_2006-01-17_13-05-12.bak
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
When you are finished, close the Backup and Restore window.
ote: Restoring a database causes the E to reset and is service affecting.
E....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To schedule a back up of a network element database
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
If desired, set up the scheduled backup attributes. Repeat this step for each network
element.
1. Select the network element and click the clock icon.
The Scheduled Backup Properties window is displayed.
2. Check the Enable Scheduled Backup check box.
3. Use the calendar GUI to specify the attributes for the scheduled backup.
4. Click OK.
ote: Scheduled database backups are suspended while the E is undergoing a
software upgrade.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
When you are finished, close the Backup and Restore window.
E....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-42
System administration
1696 ROADM and 1830 PSS network element database
backup and restore
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To restore a network element database
ote: The E must be deleted and re-added after an E restore (see “To rediscover a
network element with a new database” (p. 3-10)).
etwork elements must be restored individually. You cannot multi-select network
elements and restore them all with a single function. You can have multiple network
elements in the Backup and Restore window, but you must initiate the restore operation
one at a time.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
From the 1354 RM-PhM Topology view, select the network element(s) that you want to
restore.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Choose Maintenance> E Database Backup and Restore.
The Backup and Restore window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Select the network element to be restored and click Action>Restore or click the Restore
icon.
The Select a database backup file window is displayed.
If the Backup Server is not the 1354 RM-PhM server, then enter a FTP username and
password and click Connect.
o username and password is required if the Backup Server is the 1354 RM-PhM server.
The 1354 RM-PhM displays the file structure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
Locate and select the file from which you wish to restore the database.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
Click the Select button.
The 1354 RM-PhM initiates the restore and provides status and progress feedback in the
lower pane of the Backup and Restore window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6
When you are finished, close the Backup and Restore window.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-43
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
Performance Monitoring (PM) Archive Setting
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Performance Monitoring (PM) Archive Setting
The PM Archive Setting feature allows an external tool to process the 1354 RM-PhM
data. The 1354 RM-PhM collects PM data from the Es every 15 minutes. If “Create PM
CSV files” is enabled (see Figure 2-6, “System Settings dialog” (p. 2-45)), the data will
also be written to a CSV file (which can be opened by spreadsheet programs such as
Microsoft Excel). One CSV file is produced for each E every 15 minutes. A summary
1-day CSV file is produced at 12AM GMT every day. Once the CSV file is produced, the
1354 RM-PhM can zip and send it to a remote site via FTP based on the settings below.
If “Create SLA CVS files” is enabled (see Figure 2-6, “System Settings dialog” (p. 2-45)
), the PM system will produce SLA CVS (Comma Separated Value) files containing SLA
(Service Level Agreement) data. A CSV file will be produced every 15 minutes and will
contain an estimate of the percentage availability for each optical service. These files can
be opened by common spreadsheet programs such as Microsoft Excel.
Configuring the PM Archive Settings
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
From the 1354 RM-PhM Topology view, choose Admin > Settings. The Settings window
is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
In the Settings window, click the System Settings tab, and then click the PM tab (see
Figure 2-6, “System Settings dialog” (p. 2-45)).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-44
System administration
Performance Monitoring (PM) Archive Setting
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-6 System Settings dialog
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-45
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
SNMP Trap Alarm Forwarding
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SNMP Trap Alarm Forwarding
The purpose of this feature is to convert alarms generated by the PhM to S MP
notification traps and send the traps to a list of configured trap destinations. The feature
can be configured to send only certain types of alarms or no alarms at all:
•
Alarms generated for internal PhM conditions, and/or
•
Alarms generated based on raise and clear notification traps from network elements.
Each alarm trap can be sent to up to 10 destinations (S MP Managers). The feature is
disabled by default upon PhM installation and requires a user in the administrator’s role
to enable it.
Enabling/disabling SNMP trap sending
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
From the 1354 RM-PhM Topology view, choose Admin > Settings. The Settings window
is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
In the Settings window, click the System Settings tab, and then click the S MP Trap
Sender tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-46
System administration
SNMP Trap Alarm Forwarding
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The S MP Trap Destinations table is displayed (see Figure 2-7, “S MP Trap
Destinations table” (p. 2-47)).
Figure 2-7 SNMP Trap Destinations table
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Enable the desired trap sending option by checking the appropriate “Enable trap sending”
box.
Result: When the feature is enabled, an admin privileged user can configure the
destinations to which the traps will be forwarded. The ‘S MP trap destinations’ table
defines particular columns for each of the configuration information required to
forward Traps.
ote: The table cannot be edited if the feature is disabled.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-47
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
SNMP Trap Alarm Forwarding
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The columns of the S MP Trap Destinations table are defined as follows:
•
Use: The traps are forwarded only to those destinations for which the Use
Destination check box is enabled. All rows are validated on clicking the OK
button. In case of any violations in the data entered against the expected data, the
user would be prompted with an error dialog box containing an appropriate error
message.
•
Host: Define the destination address to which a trap will be forwarded. This can
be either an IPV4 address or a destination host name. When the Use Destination
check box is checked, this address cannot be empty nor can it contain 2
consecutive colons “::”.
Port: Define the destination port to which the traps are to be forwarded. By default
this column is set to port 162. When the Use Destination check box is checked,
this column must be an integer between 1 and 65535.
•
•
•
•
•
Severity: Select the desired minimum severity of the faults that need to be
forwarded as S MP traps. By default, Major severity is selected. This means
when enabled, by default, all Major and Critical faults generated by the 1354
RM-PhM would be forwarded as S MP traps.
Version: Specifies the S MP version to use when formatting the trap. The default
is v2c. For S MP v3, traps are always sent with both authentication and privacy
enabled.
Community: Defines the destination trap community string that the trap receiver is
expecting. By default the trap community is set to “public”. When the Use
Address check box is checked, this column must be a non-null string and it cannot
contain 2 consecutive colons “::”. The community string is ignored if the S MP
version is v3.
S MP v3 configurable settings for each trap destination:
– V3 User ame = User ame (default “v3DefaultUser”)
– V3 AuthPassword = Authentication password (default “v3DefAuthPass”)
– V3 PrivPassword = Privacy Password (default “v3DefPrivPass”)
S MP v3 fixed settings (these are the same for every trap destination and cannot
be changed):
– V3 AuthProtocol = Authentication Protocol (default “HMAC-MD5”)
– V3 PrivProtocol = Privacy Protcol (default “AES128”)
– EngineId = Engine ID: a 12 byte id structured as follows:
First 8 btyes always = 0x00001d3b000000a1
Final 4 bytes = IP address of S MP agent on PhM server that sent the trap
(e.g., EngineId=0x00001d3b000000a101020304 means that the PhM server
that sent the trap has IP address 1.2.3.4.)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
Click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-48
System administration
SNMP Trap Alarm Forwarding
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: All the configuration changes get applied immediately upon clicking the OK
button. All these changes are applied at a System wide level. The preferences are
persistent across client and server restarts.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-49
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
RADIUS server and user authentication
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RADIUS server and user authentication
RADIUS (remote authentication dial-in user service) is a security protocol designed to
prohibit unauthorized access to the network. It does so by providing centralized userid
and password authentication for all of the 1354 RM-PhM servers in the network.
RADIUS uses a distributed client/server architecture. In a 1696 ROADM and 1830 PSS
network, 1354 RM-PhM servers run a RADIUS client and send authorization requests to
a central RADIUS server. The RADIUS server authenticates the data against the
authentication system it is configured to use (local database, SecurID, etc.) to determine
whether the user is authorized to use the system.
The RADIUS feature does not use an encryption key. Instead, it uses a shared secret – a
text string that needs to be provisioned on both the RADIUS server and client. The shared
secret string is used to encrypt data between the RADIUS server and client. The 1354
RM-PhM installation wizard does not include a RADIUS server. To install a RADIUS
server, consult your system administrator.
How authentication works on a RADIUS-protected 1354 RM-PhM server
The following steps outline the processes that occur when a user attempts to login to a
1354 RM-PhM server on which RADIUS authentication is enabled:
1. The user is prompted to enter a username and password.
2. After the user enters a username and password, the password is encrypted and is sent,
along with the username, to the RADIUS server for authentication.
3. The RADIUS server checks that the information is correct against the authentication
system it is configured to use (local database, SecurID, etc.)
4. The RADIUS server sends a response to the RADIUS client on the 1354 RM-PhM
server.
The possible responses are as follows:
•
•
Accept: The userid and password are authenticated. In addition to the accept
response, the privilege level (admin, provisioner, or observer) associated with the
userid is also sent to the 1354 RM-PhM server. The user is logged into the 1354
RM-PhM server with the specified privileges.
ote: The “service” privilege role is not authenticated by RADIUS. It is always
authenticated locally by the EMS.
Reject: The userid and password is not authenticated. The user is prompted to
reenter the username and password. In some instances, access is denied.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-50
System administration
RADIUS server and user authentication
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuring a RADIUS server
This section describes how to configure a RADIUS server to provide user authentication
for the 1354 RM-PhM servers in the network. Procedures are included for the
Steel-Belted RADIUS server, FreeRADIUS server, and the Windows IAS (Internet
Authentication Service) server.
ote: You can use RADIUS servers from other vendors to provide authentication.
Refer to the documentation for your RADIUS server for configuration information.
You can configure each 1354 RM-PhM server to use up to two RADIUS servers, indexed
by number (1 or 2). On 1354 RM-PhM servers on which two RADIUS servers are
configured and enabled, the server first queries the server configured with index number
1. It queries the second server (index number 2) only if the first server does not respond
after the maximum number of time-outs and retries that are configured on the server have
been exceeded.
Table 2-3
Task list for configuring and using a RADIUS authentication server
Task
Procedure
Configure the RADIUS server and specify the
1354 RM-PhM servers and users that use the
server for authentication.
Use one of the following procedures,
depending on your RADIUS server:
Configure the 1354 RM-PhM servers to use
the RADIUS server and configure its
attributes.
•
“To configure a Steel-Belted RADIUS
server to provide RADIUS authentication
for 1354 RM-PhM servers” (p. 2-51)
•
“To configure a FreeRADIUS server to
provide RADIUS authentication for 1354
RM-PhM servers” (p. 2-55)
•
“To configure a Windows 2000 IAS server
to provide RADIUS authentication for
1354 RM-PhM servers” (p. 2-62)
•
“To configure a Windows 2003 IAS server
to provide RADIUS authentication for
1354 RM-PhM servers” (p. 2-65)
“To configure the 1354 RM-PhM server to use
a RADIUS server” (p. 2-68)
To configure a Steel-Belted RADIUS server to provide RADIUS authentication for
1354 RM-PhM servers
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Create a dictionary file named Tropx.dct in the same directory as the Steel-Belted
RADIUS service (usually c:\radius\service). The contents of the file are as follows:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-51
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
RADIUS server and user authentication
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
###################################################################
Tropx.dct - Tropx dictionary
#
# (See README.DCT for more details on the format of this file)
####################################################################
Use the Radius specification attributes in lieu of the Tropx ones
#
@radius.dct
#
# Define additional Tropx parameters
# (add Tropx specific attributes below)
MACRO Tropx-Attr(type,syntax) 26 [vid=7483 type1=%type% len1=+2 data=
%syntax%]
ATTRIBUTE
Tropx-NMS-Role
Tropx-Attr(2, integer) r
VALUE
Tropx-NMS-Role
Tropx-NMS-Observer
0
VALUE
Tropx-NMS-Role
Tropx-NMS-Provisioner
1
VALUE
Tropx-NMS-Role
Tropx-NMS-Administrator 2
###################################################################
Tropx.dct - Tropx dictionary
###################################################################
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Edit the vendor.ini file and add the Tropx-specific information in the [Vendor-Product
Identification] section:
[Vendor-Product Identification]
vendor-product = Tropx
dictionary = Tropx
ignore-ports = no
port-number-usage = per-port-type
help-id =
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Edit the dictiona.dcm file and add the reference to the new dictionary file at the end of the
file:
@Tropx.dct
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
Stop and start the Steel-Belted RADIUS service to load the new/edited configuration
files.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-52
System administration
RADIUS server and user authentication
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
Add the 1354 RM-PhM as a RADIUS client:
1. Launch the Steel-Belted RADIUS Administrator
2. Select RADIUS Clients and click the Add button. The Add RADIUS client dialog is
displayed.
3. Enter the attributes for the 1354 RM-PhM ( ame, Description, IP Address, Shared
secret). Select Tropx as the Make/Model.
4. Click OK.
Figure 2-8 The Add RADIUS Client dialog
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6
Use the Steel-Belted RADIUS Administrator to add the user accounts that are able to
access the 1354 RM-PhM added in Step 5.
1. Select Users and click the Add button. The Add ative User dialog is displayed.
2. Enter the ame, Description (optional), and Password for the user.
3. Specify the role associated with the userid in the User-specific configuration area. The
userid will be granted observer status if no role is configured:
a. Click on the Return list tab and click on the Add button
b. Select Tropx- MS-Role in the Attributes field.
c. In the Value field, select the role to assign to the user and click the Add button.
4. Click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-53
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
RADIUS server and user authentication
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 2-9 The Add Native User dialog
E....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-54
System administration
RADIUS server and user authentication
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To configure a FreeRADIUS server to provide RADIUS authentication for 1354
RM-PhM servers
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Log in as the root user on the server where the FreeRADIUS server is installed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
cd /etc/raddb
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Edit the three files listed below to integrate the contents shown for each, changing the ip
addresses, server names, userids, and passwords as required:
•
/etc/raddb/dictionary
#
# This is the master dictionary file, which references the
# pre-defined dictionary files included with the server.
#
# Any new/changed attributes MUST be placed in this file, as
# the pre-defined dictionaries SHOULD OT be edited.
#
# $Id: dictionary.in,v 1.4 2004/04/14 15:26:20 aland Exp $
#
#
# The filename given here should be an absolute path.
# $I CLUDE /usr/share/freeradius/dictionary
#
# Place additional attributes or $I CLUDEs here. They will
# over-ride the definitions in the pre-defined dictionaries.
#
# See the 'man' page for 'dictionary' for information on
# the format of the dictionary files.
#
# If you want to add entries to the dictionary file,
# which are OT going to be placed in a RADIUS packet,
# add them here. The numbers you pick should be between
# 3000 and 4000.
#
# ATTRIBUTE My-Local-String 3000 string
# ATTRIBUTE My-Local-IPAddr 3001 ipaddr
# ATTRIBUTE My-Local-Integer 3002 integer VE DOR Tropic 7483
ATTRIBUTE Tropic-TRX-Role 1 integer Tropic
VALUE Tropic-TRX-Role Tropic-TRX-Observer 0
VALUE Tropic-TRX-Role Tropic-TRX-Provisioner 1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-55
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
RADIUS server and user authentication
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
•
VALUE Tropic-TRX-Role Tropic-TRX-Administrator 2
ATTRIBUTE Tropic- MS-Role 2 integer Tropic
VALUE Tropic- MS-Role Tropic- MS-Observer 0
VALUE Tropic- MS-Role Tropic- MS-Provisioner 1
VALUE Tropic- MS-Role Tropic- MS-Administrator 2
/etc/raddb/users
#
# Please read the documentation file ../doc/processing_users_file,
# or 'man 5 users' (after installing the server) for more information.
# This file contains authentication security and configuration # information for each
user. Accounting requests are OT processed
# through this file. Instead, see 'acct_users', in this directory.
# The first field is the user's name and can be up to
# 253 characters in length. This is followed (on the same line) with
# the list of authentication requirements for that user. This can
# include password, comm server name, comm server port number, protocol
# type (perhaps set by the "hints" file), and huntgroup name (set by # the
"huntgroups" file).
# If you are not sure why a particular reply is being sent by the
# server, then run the server in debugging mode (radiusd -X), and
# you will see which entries in this file are matched.
# When an authentication request is received from the comm server,
# these values are tested. Only the first match is used unless the
# "Fall-Through" variable is set to "Yes".
# A special user named "DEFAULT" matches on all usernames.
# You can have several DEFAULT entries. All entries are processed
# in the order they appear in this file. The first entry that
# matches the login-request will stop processing unless you use
# the Fall-Through variable.
# If you use the database support to turn this file into a .db or .dbm
# file, the DEFAULT entries _have_ to be at the end of this file and
# you can't have multiple entries for one username.
# You don't need to specify a password if you set Auth-Type += System
# on the list of authentication requirements. The RADIUS server # will then check the
system password file.
# Indented (with the tab character) lines following the first
# line indicate the configuration values to be passed back to
# the comm server to allow the initiation of a user session.
# This can include things like the PPP configuration values
# or the host to log the user onto.
# You can include another `users' file with `$I CLUDE users.other'
#
# For a list of RADIUS attributes, and links to their definitions,
# see:
# http://www.freeradius.org/rfc/attributes.html
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-56
System administration
RADIUS server and user authentication
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
# Deny access for a specific user. ote that this entry MUST
# be before any other 'Auth-Type' attribute which results in the user
# being authenticated.
# ote that there is O 'Fall-Through' attribute, so the user will not
# be given any additional resources.
# lameuser Auth-Type := Reject
# Reply-Message = "Your account has been disabled."
#
# 1354 RM-PhM Users
#admin Auth-Type := Local, User-Password == "qweQWE!@
#124" Tropic- MS-Role = Tropic- MS-Administrator
admin2 Auth-Type := Local, User-Password == "qweQWE!@
#124" Tropic- MS-Role = Tropic- MS-Administrator
provisioner Auth-Type := Local, User-Password == "qweQWE!@ #124"
Tropic- MS-Role = Tropic- MS-Provisioner
prov2ems Auth-Type := Local, User-Password == "qweQWE!@#124"
Tropic- MS-Role = Tropic- MS-Provisioner
observer Auth-Type := Local, User-Password == "qweQWE!@#124"
Tropic- MS-Role = Tropic- MS-Observer
observer2 Auth-Type := Local, User-Password == "qweQWE!@#124"
Tropic- MS-Role = Tropic- MS-Observer
# 1696 OADM Users
# admin Auth-Type := Local, User-Password == "qweQWE!@ #125"
Tropic-TRX-Role = Tropic-TRX-Administrator
admin2 Auth-Type := Local, User-Password == "qweQWE!@#125"
Tropic-TRX-Role = Tropic-TRX-Administrator provisioner Auth-Type := Local,
User-Password == "qweQWE!@#125"
Tropic-TRX-Role = Tropic-TRX-Provisioner
prov2 Auth-Type := Local, User-Password == "qweQWE!@#125"
Tropic-TRX-Role = Tropic-TRX-Provisioner
observer Auth-Type := Local, User-Password == "qweQWE!@#125"
Tropic-TRX-Role = Tropic-TRX-Observer
obs2 Auth-Type := Local, User-Password == "qweQWE!@#125"
Tropic-TRX-Role = Tropic-TRX-Observer
# Deny access for a group of users.
# ote that there is O 'Fall-Through' attribute, so the user will not
# be given any additional resources.
#DEFAULT Group == "disabled", Auth-Type := Reject
# Reply-Message = "Your account has been disabled."
# This is a complete entry for "steve". ote that there is no Fall-Through
# entry so that no DEFAULT entry will be used, and the user will OT
# get any attributes in addition to the ones listed here.
# #steve Auth-Type := Local, User-Password == "testing"
# Service-Type = Framed-User,
# Framed-Protocol = PPP,
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-57
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
RADIUS server and user authentication
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
# Framed-IP-Address = 172.16.3.33,
# Framed-IP- etmask = 255.255.255.0,
# Framed-Routing = Broadcast-Listen,
# Framed-Filter-Id = "std.ppp",
# Framed-MTU = 1500,
# Framed-Compression = Van-Jacobsen-TCP-IP
# This is an entry for a user with a space in their name.
# ote the double quotes surrounding the name.
#"John Doe" Auth-Type := Local, User-Password == "hello"
# Reply-Message = "Hello, %u"
# Dial user back and telnet to the default host for that port
#Deg Auth-Type := Local, User-Password == "ge55ged"
# Service-Type = Callback-Login-User,
# Login-IP-Host = 0.0.0.0,
# Callback- umber = "9,5551212",
# Login-Service = Telnet,
# Login-TCP-Port = Telnet
# Another complete entry. After the user "dialbk" has logged in, the
# connection will be broken and the user will be dialed back after which
# he will get a connection to the host "timeshare1".
#dialbk Auth-Type := Local, User-Password == "callme"
# Service-Type = Callback-Login-User,
# Login-IP-Host = timeshare1,
# Login-Service = PortMaster,
# Callback- umber = "9,1-800-555-1212"
# user "swilson" will only get a static IP number if he logs in with
# a framed protocol on a terminal server in Alphen (see the huntgroups file).
# ote that by setting "Fall-Through", other attributes will be added from # the
following DEFAULT entries
#swilson Service-Type == Framed-User, Huntgroup- ame == "alphen"
# Framed-IP-Address = 192.168.1.65,
# Fall-Through = Yes
# If the user logs in as 'username.shell', then authenticate them
# against the system database, give them shell access, and stop processing
# the rest of the file.
#DEFAULT Suffix == ".shell", Auth-Type := System
# Service-Type = Login-User,
# Login-Service = Telnet,
# Login-IP-Host = your.shell.machine
# The rest of this file contains the several DEFAULT entries.
# DEFAULT entries match with all login names.
# ote that DEFAULT entries can also Fall-Through (see first entry).
# A name-value pair from a DEFAULT entry will _ EVER_ override
# an already existing name-value pair.
#
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-58
System administration
RADIUS server and user authentication
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
# First setup all accounts to be checked against the U IX /etc/passwd. # (Unless a
password was already given earlier in this file).
# DEFAULT Auth-Type = System Fall-Through = 1
# Set up different IP address pools for the terminal servers.
# ote that the "+" behind the IP address means that this is the "base"
# IP address. The Port-Id (S0, S1 etc) will be added to it.
#DEFAULT Service-Type == Framed-User, Huntgroup- ame == "alphen"
# Framed-IP-Address = 192.168.1.32+,
# Fall-Through = Yes
#DEFAULT Service-Type == Framed-User, Huntgroup- ame == "delft"
# Framed-IP-Address = 192.168.2.32+,
# Fall-Through = Yes
# Defaults for all framed connections.
# DEFAULT Service-Type == Framed-User Framed-IP-Address = 255.255.255.254,
Framed-MTU = 576,
Service-Type = Framed-User,
Fall-Through = Yes
# Default for PPP: dynamic IP address, PPP mode, VJ-compression.
# OTE: we do not use Hint = "PPP", since PPP might also be auto-detected
# by the terminal server in which case there may not be a "P" suffix.
# The terminal server sends "Framed-Protocol = PPP" for auto PPP.
# DEFAULT Framed-Protocol == PPP Framed-Protocol = PPP, Framed-Compression
= Van-Jacobson-TCP-IP
# Default for CSLIP: dynamic IP address, SLIP mode, VJ-compression.
# DEFAULT Hint == "CSLIP"
Framed-Protocol = SLIP,
Framed-Compression = Van-Jacobson-TCP-IP
# Default for SLIP: dynamic IP address, SLIP mode.
# DEFAULT Hint == "SLIP" Framed-Protocol = SLIP
# Last default: rlogin to our main server.
#DEFAULT
# Service-Type = Login-User,
# Login-Service = Rlogin,
# Login-IP-Host = shellbox.ispdomain.com
#
# Last default: shell on the local terminal server.
#
# # DEFAULT
# Service-Type = Shell-User
# On no match, the user is denied access.
•
/etc/raddb/clients.conf
#
# clients.conf - client configuration directives
#
# Definition of a RADIUS client (usually a AS).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-59
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
RADIUS server and user authentication
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
#
# The information given here over rides anything given in the
# 'clients' file, or in the 'naslist' file. The configuration here
# contains all of the information from those two files, and allows
# for more configuration items.
#
# The "shortname" is be used for logging. The "nastype", "login" and
# "password" fields are mainly used for checkrad and are optional.
#
# Defines a RADIUS client. The format is 'client [hostname|ip-address]'
#
# '127.0.0.1' is another name for 'localhost'. It is enabled by default,
# to allow testing of the server after an initial installation. If you
# are not going to be permitting RADIUS queries from localhost, we suggest
# that you delete, or comment out, this entry.
# client 127.0.0.1 {
#
# The shared secret use to "encrypt" and "sign" packets between
# the AS and FreeRADIUS. You MUST change this secret from the
# default, otherwise it's not a secret any more!
#
# The secret can be any string, up to 32 characters in length.
# secret = testing123
#
# The short name is used as an alias for the fully qualified
# domain name, or the IP address.
# shortname = localhost
#
# the following three fields are optional, but may be used by
# checkrad.pl for simultaneous use checks
# The nastype tells 'checkrad.pl' which AS-specific method to
# use to query the AS for simultaneous use.
#
# Permitted AS types are:
# cisco
# computone
# livingston
# max40xx
# multitech
# netserver
# pathras
# patton
# portslave
# tc
# usrhiper
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-60
System administration
RADIUS server and user authentication
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
# other
# for all other types
# nastype = other
# localhost isn't usually a AS...
#
# The following two configurations are for future use.
# The 'naspasswd' file is currently used to store the AS
# login name and password, which is used by checkrad.pl
# when querying the AS for simultaneous use.
#
# login = !root
# password = someadminpas }
#client some.host.org {
# secret = testing123
# shortname = localhost
#}
# You can now specify one secret for a network of clients.
# When a client request comes in, the BEST match is chosen.
# i.e. The entry from the smallest possible network.
#
#client 192.168.0.0/24 {
# secret = testing123-1
# shortname = private-network-1
#}
#te
#client 192.168.0.0/16 {
# secret = testing123-2
# shortname = private-network-2
#}
# RADIUS client for the 1354 RM-PhM server
# client 138.120.203.14 {
# secret and password are mapped through the "secrets" file. secret = testingEMS
shortname = nmsx8
# the following three fields are optional, but may be used by
# checkrad.pl for simultaneous usage checks
# nastype = other
# login = !root
#password = someadminpas } client 138.120.203.10 {
# secret and password are mapped through the "secrets" file. secret = testingEMS
shortname = nmsx10
# the following three fields are optional, but may be used by
# checkrad.pl for simultaneous usage checks
# nastype = other
# login = !root
#password = someadminpas }
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-61
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
RADIUS server and user authentication
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
# RADIUS client for the 1696 ROADM network elements
#client 10.27.0.0/16 {
# secret and password are mapped through the "secrets" file. secret = testing E
shortname = 1696R
# the following three fields are optional, but may be used by
# checkrad.pl for simultaneous usage checks
# nastype = other
# login = !root
#password = someadminpas }
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
Stop radius using the following:
/etc/init.d/radiusd stop
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
Start radius using the following:
/etc/init.d/radiusd start
E....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To configure a Windows 2000 IAS server to provide RADIUS authentication for 1354
RM-PhM servers
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Install the Windows 2000 IAS (Internet Authentication Service) on your Windows 2000
server. Refer to the product documentation for details.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Create the following three groups on the IAS server (one for each of the three privilege
levels on the 1354 RM-PhM server). Create user accounts and add them to the groups.
ote: IAS RADIUS authentication defaults account authentication to the domain that
the server is a member of. Therefore logins without an explicit domain included in the
username must have an account in the domain the server is a member of.
If you are not using an account from the server default domain (e.g. a local server
account for a stand-alone server), you must specify the domain/hostname in the
username at login (e.g. for user myaccount, enter winserv1\myaccount at login, where
winserv1 is the hostname of a stand-alone server).
Platform
Privilege level
Recommended group name
1354 RM-PhM server
Admin
1354 RM-PhM Admin
Provisioner
1354 RM-PhM Provisioner
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-62
System administration
RADIUS server and user authentication
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Platform
Privilege level
Recommended group name
Observer
1354 RM-PhM Observer
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Select Start > Programs > Administrative Tools > Internet Authentication Service.
If Administrative Tools does not show up under Programs, click Start, select Run, enter
mmc, and click OK. On the Console window that appeared, click File, select Add
Snap-in, click Add, and select Internet Authentication Service from the list. Click Add,
then OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
Perform the following substeps to create a client for a 1354 RM-PhM server for which
you want to provide RADIUS authentication. Perform this step as many times as required
to create clients for each server in the network:
1. Right click on Client and select New Client. The Add Client dialog is displayed.
2. Enter the following information in the Add Client dialog:
Friendly name
Enter the E name
Protocol
Set to RADIUS
3. Click Next. The Add RADIUS Client dialog is displayed.
4. Enter the following information in the Add RADIUS Client dialog:
Client address
Enter the IP address of the 1354 RM-PhM server
Client-Vendor
Set to RADIUS Standard
Shared secret
Enter the secret that is shared between the IAS RADIUS server
and the 1354 RM-PhM server. This is the same shared secret
that is specified on the server in its RADIUS configuration.
Confirm shared secret
Re-enter the shared secret.
5. Click Next.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-63
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
RADIUS server and user authentication
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
Perform the following substeps to create a remote access policy for each of the groups
added in Step 2. You must perform these steps once for each group.
1. From the Internet Authentication Service, right click on Remote Access Policies
and select New Remote Access Policy.
2. Enter the name for the remote access policy in the Policy Friendly name field of
the New Remote Access Policy dialog. It is recommended that you use the same
name as specified for the group in Step 2, as listed below:
Platform
Privilege level
Recommended remote
access policy name
1354 RM-PhM server
Admin
1354 RM-PhM Admin
Provisioner
1354 RM-PhM Provisioner
Observer
1354 RM-PhM Observer
3. Click Next. The Add Remote Access Policy dialog box is displayed.
4. Click Add in the Add Remote Access Policy dialog box. The Select Attribute
dialog box is displayed.
5. Double-click Windows-Groups in the Select Attribute dialog box. The Groups
dialog box is displayed.
6. Click Add in the Groups dialog box. The groups configured on the IAS server are
listed, including those added in Step 2. Double click on the group you want to add,
click OK to add the group and OK again to confirm.
7. Go back to the Add Remote Access Policy dialog box and click Next.
8. Select Grant remote access permission and click Next.
9. Click Edit Profile. The Edit Dial-In Profile dialog box is displayed.
10. Select the Authentication tab in the Edit Dial-in Profile dialog box and configure
the options. Select "MD5-Challenge" from EAP Methods, and check PAP as
Authentication Method.
11. Select the Advanced tab, and click Add.
12. Double-click the line beginning with Vendor-Specific in the RADIUS attributes list.
13. Click Add in the Multivalued Attribute Information dialog box and enter the
following information:
Enter vendor code
7483
Conforms to RADIUS RFC
Yes
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-64
System administration
RADIUS server and user authentication
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
14. Click Configure Attribute in the Multivalued Attribute Information dialog box
and enter the following information:
Vendor-assigned attribute number
2 for 1354 RM-PhM servers
Attribute format
Decimal
Attribute value
0 for observer
1 for provisioner
2 for admin
15. Click OK in the Vendor-Specific Attribute Information and Multivalued
Attribute Information dialog boxes.
16. Click Close in the Add Attributes dialog box.
17. Click OK in the Edit Dial-In Profile dialog box.
18. Repeat Step 5 until you have added a remote access policy for each group.
19. Click Finish in the Add Remote Access Policy dialog box.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To configure a Windows 2003 IAS server to provide RADIUS authentication for 1354
RM-PhM servers
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Install the Windows 2003 IAS (Internet Authentication Service) on your Windows 2003
server. Refer to the product documentation for details.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Create the following three groups on the IAS server (one for each of the three privilege
levels on the 1354 RM-PhM server). Create user accounts and add them to the groups.
ote: IAS RADIUS authentication defaults account authentication to the domain that
the server is a member of. Therefore logins without an explicit domain included in the
username must have an account in the domain the server is a member of.
If you are not using an account from the server default domain (e.g. a local server
account for a stand-alone server), you must specify the domain/hostname in the
username at login (e.g. for user myaccount you enter winserv1\myaccount at login,
where winserv1 is the hostname of a stand-alone server).
Platform
Privilege level
Recommended group name
1354 RM-PhM server
Admin
1354 RM-PhM Admin
Provisioner
1354 RM-PhM Provisioner
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-65
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
RADIUS server and user authentication
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Platform
Privilege level
Recommended group name
Observer
1354 RM-PhM Observer
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Select Start > Programs > Administrative Tools > Internet Authentication Service. If
Administrative Tools does not show up under Programs, click Start, select Run, enter
mmc, and click OK. On the Console window that appeared, click File, select Add
Snap-in, click Add, and select Internet Authentication Service from the list. Click Add,
then OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
Perform the following substeps to create a client for a 1354 RM-PhM server for which
you want to provide RADIUS authentication. Perform this step as many times as required
to create clients for each E or server in the network:
1. Right click on Client and select New Client. The Add Client dialog is displayed.
2. Enter the following information in the Add Client dialog:
Friendly name
Enter the E name
Client IP
Enter the IP address of the 1354 RM-PhM server
3. Click Next. The New RADIUS Client dialog is displayed.
4. Enter the following information in the Add RADIUS Client dialog:
Client-Vendor
Set to RADIUS Standard
Shared secret
Enter the secret that is shared between the IAS RADIUS server
and the 1354 RM-PhM server. This is the same shared secret
that is specified on the E or server in its RADIUS
configuration.
Confirm shared secret
Re-enter the shared secret.
5. Do not select the Request must confirm the Message Authentication
attribute checkbox.
6. Click Finish.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-66
System administration
RADIUS server and user authentication
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
Perform the following substeps to create a remote access policy for each of the groups
added in Step 2. You must perform these steps once for each group.
1. From the Internet Authentication Service, right click on Remote Access Policies
and select New Remote Access Policy. Do not use the wizard to create the policy.
2. Enter the name for the remote access policy in the Policy Friendly name field of
the New Remote Access Policy dialog. It is recommended that you use the same
name as specified for the group in Step 2, as listed below:
Platform
Privilege level
Recommended remote
access policy name
1354 RM-PhM server
Admin
1354 RM-PhM Admin
Provisioner
1354 RM-PhM Provisioner
Observer
1354 RM-PhM Observer
3. Click Next. The Policy Condition dialog box is displayed. Click Add, and select
Windows-Groups from the list, click Add and enter the user group associated with the
policy. Click OK twice - Windows-Groups appears in Policy Conditions window.
4. Click Next. Permissions dialog box is displayed. Select Grant remote access
permission and click Next.
5. Click Edit Profile. The Edit Dial-In Profile dialog box is displayed.
6. Select Authentication tab.
7. Click EAP Methods and select MD5-Challenge and then click OK. Uncheck all
authentication methods except Unencrypted Authentication (PAP, SPAP) - it should be
checked.
8. Select the Advanced tab, remove all default attributes, and click Add.
9. Double-click the line beginning with Vendor-Specific in the RADIUS attributes list.
10. Click Add in the Multivalued Attribute Information dialog box and enter the
following information:
Enter vendor code
7483
Conforms to RADIUS RFC
Yes
11. Click Configure Attribute in the Multivalued Attribute Information dialog box
and enter the following information:
Vendor-assigned attribute number
2 for 1354 RM-PhM servers
Attribute format
Decimal
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-67
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
RADIUS server and user authentication
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Attribute value
0 for observer
1 for provisioner
2 for admin
12. Click OK in the Vendor-Specific Attribute Information and Multivalued
Attribute Information dialog boxes.
13. Click Close in the Add Attributes dialog box.
14. Click OK in the Edit Dial-In Profile dialog box and click Next, then click Finish.
15. Repeat Step 5 until you have added a remote access policy for each group.
E....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To configure the 1354 RM-PhM server to use a RADIUS server
You can configure each 1354 RM-PhM server to use up to two RADIUS servers, indexed
by number (1 or 2). The server configured with index number 1 is the active server. The
server configured with index number 2 is the backup server and is used only if server 1 is
not available.
To configure a 1354 RM-PhM server to use a RADIUS server, perform the procedure “To
configure 1354 RM-PhM user authentication properties” (p. 2-69).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-68
System administration
1354 RM-PhM user management
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1354 RM-PhM user management
The 1354 RM-PhM user management capability allows the administrator to perform the
following functions:
•
•
configure 1354 RM-PhM user authentication properties
monitor 1354 RM-PhM user sessions - view which users are logged on, and
disconnect them if required
•
manage 1354 RM-PhM user accounts - create or delete accounts
To configure 1354 RM-PhM user authentication properties
The 1354 RM-PhM can use RADIUS to authenticate userids and passwords for all of the
1354 RM-PhM users in the network.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
From the 1354 RM-PhM Topology view, choose Admin>Settings.
The Settings window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
In the Settings window, click the System Settings tab, and then click the User
Authentication tab.
The user authentication properties are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
From the Authentication Behavior drop-down menu, choose the authentication order.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
If you are using RADIUS, specify the RADIUS server configuration properties:
1. Check the Radius 1 Enable check box. This enables the attribute fields for RADIUS
server 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Specify the hostname or IP address of RADIUS server 1.
Specify the port to which to connect on RADIUS server 1.
Specify the shared secret.
Confirm the shared secret.
Specify the RADIUS time-out in seconds (range 1 - 30).
Specify the number of RADIUS retries - (range 0 - 10).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
If you wish to specify a second RADIUS server, repeat Step 4 for RADIUS Server 2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-69
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
1354 RM-PhM user management
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6
In the Maximum Failed Login Attempts field, specify the maximum number of failed
login attempts that are permitted before user is logged out. This field applies only to local
authentication, not to RADIUS authentication.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7
Click OK.
E....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To monitor or disconnect 1354 RM-PhM users
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
From the 1354 RM-PhM Topology view, choose Admin>EMS User Sessions.
The User Sessions window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
To refresh the view, click the Auto-Refresh button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
To refresh the view automatically:
1. Click the Auto-Refresh button so that it is in the “depressed” state.
2. Click the Auto-Refresh Interval button. A slide is displayed. Use the slider to specify
the refresh rate in seconds.
3. Click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
To disconnect a user, select the user from the list, and then click the Terminate User
button.
Click Yes in response to the prompt.
E....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To manage 1354 RM-PhM user accounts
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
From the 1354 RM-PhM Topology view, choose Admin>EMS User Accounts.
The User Accounts window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-70
System administration
1354 RM-PhM user management
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
To create a new account, click the Create new user account button. The Create User
Account window is displayed. Specify the account properties as desired:
•
•
Username - specify an unique name for the user.
ew password - Enter the new password (see “Password Rules” below).
Password Rules
Password allowable characters:
– Lowercase alphabetic characters in the set [a-z]
– Uppercase alphabetic characters in the set [A-Z]
–
umeric characters in the set [0-9]
– Special characters: !(exclamation), @(at), # (pound), $ (dollar), %(percent),
^(caret), &(ampersand), * (star), ( (left bracket), ) (right bracket), _(underscore),
+(plus)
Password complexity:
– A password must start with an alphabetic character
– A password is a string consisting of a minimum of 6 and a maximum of 32
alphabetic, numeric, or special characters
– A password must have at least 1 numeric digit [0-9] not in the first or last position.
– The same character cannot repeat more than 3 times consecutively
– It must not contain the associated userid or its reverse
The 1354 RM-PhM user account password complexity rules are configurable. This is done
by editing the file ems.xml. Below are the properties and their default values:
– <property name="lumos.scontainer.sec.MinPasswordLength" value="6" />
– <property name="lumos.scontainer.sec.Min umberOfUppercase" value="0" />
– <property name="lumos.scontainer.sec.Min umberOfLowercase" value="0" />
– <property name="lumos.scontainer.sec.Min umberOf umeric" value="1" />
– <property name="lumos.scontainer.sec.Min umberOfSpecial" value="0" />
– <property name="lumos.scontainer.sec.Min umberOfRepeatingChars" value="3"
/>
•
Confirm new password - You must specify the password a second time to confirm the
password.
•
Change password on first login - check the box to specify that the user must change
the password on first login.
Max password age (days) - specify the number of days after which the user must
specify a new password when they log in.
•
•
•
•
Max inactivity period (days) - specify the number of days after which if the user has
not logged in, they are locked out from the 1354 RM-PhM.
Max concurrent sessions - specify the maximum number of login sessions that this
user is allowed to run at the same time.
User role - from the drop-down menu, choose the applicable role for this user. Refer
to Table 2-4, “1354 RM-PhM user role permissions” (p. 2-72).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-71
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
1354 RM-PhM user management
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
To delete an account, select the account from the list and click the Remove user account
button. Deleting an account automatically shuts down all sessions the user is currently
running.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
To modify an account, select the account from the list, and click the Display user account
properties button. The User Account window is displayed. Make changes to the account
properties as desired, and then click OK.
•
•
Username - specify an unique name for the user.
ew password - Enter the password (see “Password Rules” above).
•
Confirm new password - You must specify the password a second time to confirm the
password.
Account access - from the drop-down menu, choose the access status for this user:
–
o change - leave the access status unchanged.
– Logins allowed - the user is allowed to log in. Use this after a user has been
locked out but is being reinstated.
– Password change on next login - forces the user to specify a new password the
next time they log in.
•
–
•
•
•
•
Lock account and terminate all sessions - Terminates all sessions and prevents the
user from logging in.
Max password age (days) - specify the number of days after which the user must
specify a new password when they log in.
Max inactivity period (days) - specify the number of days after which if the user has
not logged in, they are locked out from the 1354 RM-PhM.
Max concurrent sessions - specify the maximum number of login sessions that this
user is allowed to run at the same time.
User role - from the drop-down menu, choose the applicable role for this user. Refer
to Table 2-4, “1354 RM-PhM user role permissions” (p. 2-72).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
To refresh the user account window, click the Refresh button.
Table 2-4
1354 RM-PhM user role permissions
Function
Admin
EMS server database backup
x
EMS server shutdown
x
Manage 1354 RM-PhM user
accounts
x
View 1354 RM-PhM user sessions
x
Provisioner
Observer
x
x
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-72
System administration
1354 RM-PhM user management
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 2-4
1354 RM-PhM user role permissions
Function
Admin
Manage E user accounts
x
E backup/restore
x
E software download
x
TCA administration
(continued)
Provisioner
Observer
x
x
x
x
Create/modify/delete Es
x
x
Create/modify/delete groups
x
x
Create/modify/delete services
x
x
View services
x
x
Modify inventory
x
x
View inventory
x
x
Modify physical topology
x
x
View physical topology
x
x
x
Configure log and archive settings
x
View logs
x
x
x
Export logs
x
x
x
Modify facility/connection
x
x
View facility/connection
x
x
Launch static network
commissioning wizard
x
x
Create/modify topological
connection
x
x
View topological connection
x
x
Configure auto discovery
x
x
Configure TP properties
x
x
Manage APS groups
x
x
View APS groups
x
x
Launch network commissioning
wizard
x
x
Launch network alteration wizard
x
x
Launch power balancing wizard
x
x
Create loss report
x
x
E alarm severity administration
x
x
x
x
x
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-73
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
1354 RM-PhM user management
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-74
System administration
NE user management
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NE user management
The 1354 RM-PhM E user management capability allows the administrator to perform
the following functions:
•
•
add user accounts to the table view for a new network element
remove accounts from the table view for a network element
•
•
view the selected user account details.
create a new user account on a network element.
•
•
delete the selected user account(s) on the network element. The service account
cannot not be deleted.
update user account password on the network element. The service account cannot be
changed.
enable the selected user account(s) on the network element.
•
disable the selected user account(s) on the network element.
•
For more information, refer to the 1830 PSS-32 User Provisioning Guide and 1696
ROADM documentation.
To manage NE users and accounts
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
From the 1354 RM-PhM Topology view, choose Admin> E User Management.
The E User Management window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
To refresh the view, click the Refresh button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
To add the user accounts for a network element to the table, click the Add user accounts
button.
A pop-up window prompts you to select the E for which you want to view accounts.
Select the E from the list, and click OK. The user accounts for that E are added to the
E User Management window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
To remove accounts from the table view for a network element, click the Remove user
accounts button.
A pop-up window prompts you to select the E for which you want to remove accounts.
Select the E from the list, and click OK. The user accounts for that E are removed
from the E User Management window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-75
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
NE user management
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
To display or modify an account's properties, select the account from the list, and click
the Display user account properties button (or double-click the account). The Modify
User Account window is displayed. Make changes to the account properties as desired,
and then click OK.
•
Access level- from the drop-down menu, choose the access status for this user:
– administrator
– provisioner
– observer
•
Status - from the drop-down menu, choose the account status for this user:
– enabled
– disabled
•
ew Password - Enter the new password (see “Password Rules” below).
Password Rules
Password allowable characters:
– Lowercase alphabetic characters in the set [a-z]
– Uppercase alphabetic characters in the set [A-Z]
–
umeric characters in the set [0-9]
– Special characters: !(exclamation), @(at), # (pound), $ (dollar), %(percent),
^(caret), &(ampersand), * (star), ( (left bracket), ) (right bracket), _(underscore),
+(plus)
Password complexity:
– A password must start with an alphabetic character
– A password is a string consisting of a minimum of 6 and a maximum of 32
alphabetic, numeric, or special characters
– A password must have at least 1 numeric digit [0-9] not in the first or last position.
– The same character cannot repeat more than 3 times consecutively
– It must not contain the associated userid or its reverse
The 1354 RM-PhM user account password complexity rules are configurable. This is done
by editing the file ems.xml. Below are the properties and their default values:
– <property name="lumos.scontainer.sec.MinPasswordLength" value="6" />
– <property name="lumos.scontainer.sec.Min umberOfUppercase" value="0" />
– <property name="lumos.scontainer.sec.Min umberOfLowercase" value="0" />
– <property name="lumos.scontainer.sec.Min umberOf umeric" value="1" />
– <property name="lumos.scontainer.sec.Min umberOfSpecial" value="0" />
– <property name="lumos.scontainer.sec.Min umberOfRepeatingChars" value="3"
/>
•
•
Confirm password - You must specify the password a second time to confirm the
password.
To save the changes to the account, click Apply.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-76
System administration
NE user management
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6
To create a new account, click the Create new user account button. The Create User
Account window is displayed. Specify the account properties as desired:
•
Username - specify an unique name for the user.
•
Access level- from the drop-down menu, choose the access status for this user:
– administrator
– provisioner
– observer
Session Timeout (minutes) - Enter number of minutes before session will timeout
•
•
Status - from the drop-down menu, choose the account status for this user:
– enabled
– disabled
Password - Enter a password (see “Password Rules” table in Step #5).
•
Confirm password - You must specify the password a second time to confirm the
password.
•
Selected E(s) - from the list, select the E(s) on which this account is to be created.
To complete the account creation, click Apply.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7
To delete an account, select the account from the list and click the Remove a user account
button.
If the user is not currently logged in, a pop-up window prompts you to confirm the
account delete. Click OK. The user account is deleted from the E.
If the user is currently logged in, you receive an error message. Verify that you are
deleting the correct user, and if so, contact the user and have them log off. Try again to
delete the account.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8
To enable a user, select the user from the list, and then click the Enable a user account
button.
A pop-up window prompts you to confirm the account enable. Click OK. The user
account is enabled on the E.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9
To disable a user, select the user from the list, and then click the Disable a user account
button.
A pop-up window prompts you to confirm the account disable. Click OK. The user
account is disabled on the E.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-77
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
NE user management
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ote: Disabling an account that is logged in will not succeed.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-78
System administration
1354 RM-PhM login session settings
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1354 RM-PhM login session settings
Administrative users can enable/disable a default login banner. Also the administrative
user can configure the text of a post-login banner and can enable/disable the post-login
banner. If it is enabled, the post-login banner is displayed after a successful login. A user
must acknowledge that they have read the banner before proceeding. Otherwise the user
is logged out.
Administrative users can enable a session time-out that applies to all users of the 1354
RM-PhM. When session time-outs are enabled, individual user sessions are assigned the
default time-out specified by the administrator. Individual users can change the default
time-out for their own session by entering a new value. The time-out value for an
individual user cannot exceed the maximum time-out value specified by the
administrative user.
The administrative user can also enable/disable the SSL Security setting.
Enable/disable login banner
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
From the 1354 RM-PhM Topology view, choose Admin > Settings.
The Settings window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
In the Settings window, click the System Settings tab, and then click the Login Session
Settings tab.
The session properties are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
To enable the login banner select the box.
The login banner title and body text can be created/modified.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Enable/disable post-login banner
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
From the 1354 RM-PhM Topology view, choose Admin > Settings.
The Settings window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-79
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
1354 RM-PhM login session settings
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
In the Settings window, click the System Settings tab, and then click the Login Session
Settings tab.
The session properties are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
To enable the post-login banner select the box.
The post-login banner title and body text can be created/modified.
E....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To set the session time-out for all 1354 RM-PhM users
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
From the 1354 RM-PhM Topology view, choose Admin > Settings.
The Settings window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
In the Settings window, click the System Settings tab, and then click the Login Session
Settings tab.
The session properties are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Specify the session time-out attributes as follows:
•
•
•
Session Time-outs Enabled: Click this checkbox to enable session time-outs for all
1354 RM-PhM users.
Maximum time-out (minutes): The maximum value that a user can set their session
time-out to. Range: 1 - 10800 minutes (1 week). Default: 10800 minutes
Default time-out: The default time-out value for user sessions. Range: 1 minute to
max time-out value configured above. Default: 1 day (1440 minutes).
ote: Changes to this screen take effect for all subsequent user logins and do not
affect currently logged in users.
E....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Enable SSL security setting
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
From the 1354 RM-PhM Topology view, choose Admin > Settings.
The Settings window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-80
System administration
1354 RM-PhM login session settings
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
In the Settings window, click the System Settings tab, and then click the Login Session
Settings tab.
The session properties are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
To enable SSL, select the box under Security Settings.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To change the default time-out for a user session
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
From the 1354 RM-PhM Topology view, choose Admin > Settings. The Settings window
is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
In the Settings window, click the User Settings tab, and then click the User Session tab.
The session time-out properties are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Enter a new value for the session time-out, in minutes. This value cannot exceed the
maximum time-out specified by the administrator.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-81
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
1696 ROADM and 1830 PSS network element software
management
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1696 ROADM and 1830 PSS network element
software management
This section describes the management of network element software from the 1354
RM-PhM. For an overview of software management, refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830
PSS-32 User Provisioning Guide.
ote: To avoid conflicting activities on a network element, ensure that you coordinate
your activities with other operators in the network.
Before you can download software to a network element, you must set up a software
server and a backup server. For an overview of software downloading and setting up
servers, refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 User Provisioning Guide.
You must then specify the database backup properties for each network element, as well
as the software server from which to download the software.
ote: Do not perform any manual or scheduled database backups while loading
software. The software loading process performs its own backups. You can perform
backups prior to loading software, but not while software loading is in progress.
The major activities involved in loading software are:
1. Phase 1 - specify the target release, audit the network element(s), and view the
software upgrade script.
2. Phase 2 - load the software onto the selected network element(s).
3. Phase 3 - activate the new software.
Before activating the software on an E after a software download, all non-software
loading related alarms must be set to Acknowledged.
4. Phase 4 - commit the network element(s) to the new software, or back out.
This section contains the following procedures:
• “To perform a manual software download to a network element” (p. 2-82)
• “To schedule a manual software download and activation” (p. 2-85)
• “To perform an automatic software download to a network element” (p. 2-87)
To perform a manual software download to a network element
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
From the 1354 RM-PhM Topology view, select the network element(s) to which you want
to download software, and choose Maintenance> E Software Upgrade.
The Software Upgrade window is displayed, with the selected network element(s) listed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-82
System administration
1696 ROADM and 1830 PSS network element software
management
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alternatively, if you select no network elements in the topology view, the Software
Management window lists all of the network elements.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Specify the software server from which to obtain the software:
•
Choose a software server from the Software Server drop-down menu or type in its IP
address. The list of servers in this menu is composed of the default software servers
specified for each of the network elements in the list.
•
If the software server address you desire in not in the drop-down menu, you can type
it into the Software Server field.
It is recommended that you use the 1354 RM-PhM server as the software server.
Check the EMS is Software Server check box.
•
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Specify the protocol to be used to access the software server. It is recommended that you
select “Use Default file transfer settings”. (You need to set up the defaults first. To set up
the defaults click the “System settings” button in this window.)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
Specify the userid that is to be user to access the software server. It is recommended that
you select “Use Default file transfer settings”, in which case this field is not changeable.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
Specify the Target Release Directory. Click the folder icon beside the Target Release
Directory field. If the software server is not the 1354 RM-PhM server, an FTP server
login window is displayed. Specify the login information (the FTP server address is set to
the value specified in Step 2. You can overwrite this value manually if desired) and click
Connect. o login information is required if the 1354 RM-PhM is acting as the software
server.
Locate and select the file from which you wish to load software.
Click the Select button.
The selected software server directory appears in the Target Release Directory field, and
the name of the target release within the Target Release Directory is displayed in the
Target Release field.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6
If you want to back up the database of the network element(s) as part of the software
download process, check the Backup etwork Element Database check box. To specify
the database backup attributes, click the Open Backup and Restore button. The Backup
and Restore window is displayed. Refer to “To back up a network element database”
(p. 2-41) for information on setting backup parameters.
ote: It is recommended that you select this option.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-83
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
1696 ROADM and 1830 PSS network element software
management
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7
If you want to perform a software upgrade check to ensure compatibility between the
committed release of software on the network element(s) and the target load, check the
Check Upgrade Path check box.
ote: It is recommended that you select this option.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8
From the list of network elements, select those network elements to which you want to
download the specified software, and click the Phase 1 - Generate a ew Software
Upgrade Script button.
A warning is displayed, listing the parameters specified and asking you to confirm
whether or not you want to proceed. If the parameters are correct, click Yes. Otherwise
click no, correct the settings, and try again.
The 1354 RM-PhM provides status and progress feedback in the lower pane of the
Software Upgrade window.
Once the script has been generated, you can view it by clicking the View the Software
Upgrade Script button. The script is displayed in a new window. If the script is correct,
proceed to the next step. If not, you must correct any problems before continuing.
The 1696 ROADM and 1830 PSS creates a unique script for each of the selected Es
(each script has separate load and activate activities).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9
Load the software onto the selected network element(s). Click the Phase 2 - Load the
Target Software button.
The 1354 RM-PhM provides status and progress feedback in the lower pane of the
Software Upgrade window. Once the software has been loaded onto the network
element(s), proceed to the next step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
Activate the new software. Click the Phase 3 - Activate the Target Software button.
You can perform the operation on multiple network elements by multi-selecting them
before clicking the button. This is particularly useful in this step because when you
activate the network elements they reset, which disrupts control network traffic. The 1354
RM-PhM and network elements work together to ensure that the activate message can be
successfully sent to all the selected network elements before they start resetting.
The system performs a pre-activation check to ensure that there are no unacknowledged
alarms on the network element, and that the network element is in sync with the 1354
RM-PhM.
If the pre-activation check passes, the network element begins running the new software.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-84
System administration
1696 ROADM and 1830 PSS network element software
management
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the pre-activation check fails, the new software is not activated and the network
element continues to operate with the original software. Resolve the problem(s) and click
the Phase 3 - Activate the Target Software button again. If the pre-activation check fails
because of the presence of unacknowledged alarms, then an alarm browser is displayed.
To acknowledge an alarm, select it, right-click it, and select Acknowledge.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
Once software has been activated, you must decide to commit the network element to the
new software, or to back out and resume using the previous software load. If you choose
to back out, the system ensures that the last database backup is valid and restores the
database. If the last database backup is not valid, as indicated by an invalid database
alarm, then the database must be restored manually.
To commit the network element(s) to the new software, click the Phase 4 - Commit
button.
To back out of the new software load and resume using the original load, click the Back
out button.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To schedule a manual software download and activation
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
From the 1354 RM-PhM Topology view, select the network element(s) to which you want
to download software, and choose Maintenance> E Software Upgrade.
The Software Upgrade window is displayed, with the selected network element(s) listed.
Alternatively, if you select no network elements in the topology view, the Software
Management window lists all of the network elements.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Specify the software server from which to obtain the software:
•
Choose a software server from the Software Server drop-down menu. The list of
servers in this menu is composed of the default software servers specified for each of
the network elements in the list.
•
If the software server address you desire in not in the drop-down menu, you can type
it into the Software Server field.
It is recommended that you use the 1354 RM-PhM server as the software server.
•
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Specify the protocol to be used to access the software server.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-85
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
1696 ROADM and 1830 PSS network element software
management
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
Specify the userid that is to be user to access the software server.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
Specify the Target Release Directory. There are two methods:
•
•
In the Target Release Directory field, type the path to the desired software server
directory.
Locate and select the desired software server directory, as follows:
Click the folder icon beside the Target Release Directory field. If the software server
is not the 1354 RM-PhM server, an FTP server login window is displayed. Specify the
login information (the FTP server address is set to the value specified in Step 2. You
can overwrite this value manually if desired) and click Connect. o login information
is required if the 1354 RM-PhM is acting as the software server.
Locate and select the file from which you wish to load software.
Click the Select button.
The selected software server directory appears in the Target Release Directory field,
and the name of the target release within the Target Release Directory is displayed in
the Target Release field.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6
If you want to back up the database of the network element(s) as part of the software
download process, check the Backup etwork Element Database check box. To specify
the database backup attributes, click the Open Backup and Restore button. The Backup
and Restore window is displayed. Refer to “To back up a network element database”
(p. 2-41) for information on setting backup parameters.
It is recommended that you select this option.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7
If you want to perform a software upgrade check to ensure compatibility between the
committed release of software on the network element(s) and the target load, check the
Perform Upgrade Path Check check box.
It is recommended that you select this option.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8
From the list of network elements, select those network elements to which you want to
download the specified software, and click the Phase 1 - Generate a ew Software
Upgrade Script button.
A warning is displayed, listing the parameters specified and asking you to confirm
whether or not you want to proceed. If the parameters are correct, click Yes. Otherwise
click no, correct the settings, and try again.
The 1354 RM-PhM provides status and progress feedback in the lower pane of the
Software Upgrade window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-86
System administration
1696 ROADM and 1830 PSS network element software
management
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Once the script has been generated, you can view it by clicking the View the Software
Upgrade Script button. The script is displayed in a new window. If the script is correct,
proceed to the next step. If not, you must correct any problems before continuing.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9
Click the Schedule the Load Phase button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
In the Schedule Load window, check the Enable Scheduled Download Software check
box, and specify the date and time for the software download to occur. Click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
Click the Schedule the Activate Phase button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
In the Schedule Activate window, check the Enable Scheduled Activate Software load
check box, and specify the date and time for the software activation to occur.
The activate phase cannot begin until the load phase is complete. Ensure that when you
schedule the activation step that you leave enough time for the load to complete.
Click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13
Once the scheduled download and activation have taken place, the network element(s)
must be committed to the new software, or backed out. Committing or backing out must
be done manually by clicking the Commit or the Backout button.
You can schedule multiple Es at once by selecting them and clicking the Schedule
button.
You can edit the schedules of multiple Es if their schedules are identical.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To perform an automatic software download to a network element
Some functions of software loading can be performed automatically. If you choose the
automatic method, the system combines the database backup, audit, load, and activate
functions in one step. The commit/backout function must be performed in another,
separate step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
From the 1354 RM-PhM Topology view, select the network element(s) to which you want
to download software, and choose Maintenance> E Software Upgrade.
The Software Upgrade window is displayed, with the selected network element(s) listed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-87
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
1696 ROADM and 1830 PSS network element software
management
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alternatively, if you select no network elements in the topology view, the Software
Management window lists all of the network elements.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Specify the software server from which to obtain the software:
•
Choose a software server from the Software Server drop-down menu. The list of
servers in this menu is composed of the default software servers specified for each of
the network elements in the list.
•
If the software server address you desire in not in the drop-down menu, you can type
it into the Software Server field.
It is recommended that you use the 1354 RM-PhM server as the software server.
•
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Specify the protocol to be used to access the software server. It is recommended that you
select “Use Default file transfer settings”. (You need to set up the defaults first. To set up
the defaults click the “System settings” button in this window.)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
Specify the userid that is to be user to access the software server. It is recommended that
you select “Use Default file transfer settings”, in which case this field is not changeable.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
Specify the Target Release Directory. Click the folder icon beside the Target Release
Directory field. If the software server is not the 1354 RM-PhM server, an FTP server
login window is displayed. Specify the login information (the FTP server address is set to
the value specified in Step 2. You can overwrite this value manually if desired) and click
Connect. o login information is required if the 1354 RM-PhM is acting as the software
server.
Locate and select the file from which you wish to load software.
Click the Select button.
The selected software server directory appears in the Target Release Directory field, and
the name of the target release within the Target Release Directory is displayed in the
Target Release field.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6
If you want to back up the database of the network element(s) as part of the software
download process, check the Backup etwork Element Database check box. To specify
the database backup attributes, click the Open Backup and Restore button. The Backup
and Restore window is displayed. Refer to “To back up a network element database”
(p. 2-41) for information on setting backup parameters.
It is recommended that you select this option.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-88
System administration
1696 ROADM and 1830 PSS network element software
management
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7
If you want to perform a software upgrade check to ensure compatibility between the
committed release of software on the network element(s) and the target load, check the
Perform Upgrade Path Check check box.
It is recommended that you select this option.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8
From the list of network elements, select those network elements to which you want to
download the specified software, and click the Perform an Automatic Upgrade (Phase 1,
2, and 3) of the selected Es.
The 1696 ROADM and 1830 PSS creates a unique script for each of the selected Es
(each script has separate load and activate activities), and then loads and activates the
software.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9
Once software has been activated, you must decide to commit the network element to the
new software, or to backout and resume using the previous software load. If you choose
to backout, the system ensures that the last database backup is valid and restores the
database. If the last database backup is not valid, as indicated by an invalid database
alarm, then the database must be restored manually.
To commit the network element(s) to the new software, click the Phase 4 - Commit
button.
To back out of the new software load and resume using the original load, click the
Backout button.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-89
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
1354 RM-PhM management of Red-C RAMAN Amplifier &
EDFA Booster
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview
1354 RM-PhM management of Red-C RAMAN
Amplifier & EDFA Booster
Overview
This section provides details for the 1354 RM-PhM management of the RAMA
Amplifier and the EDFA Booster for integration with 1830 PSS-32 network elements.
1354 RM-PhM provides basic management of the RED-C RAMA Amplifier and EDFA
Booster as follows:
•
•
1354 RM-PhM shows each RAMA and EDFA as separate network elements that
appear in the 1354 RM-PhM topology map
1354 RM-PhM supports cut-through to the RAMA /EDFA Web-based user interface
for configuration of RAMA /EDFA network elements
•
Discovery of RAMA /EDFA is either manual or automatic. For manual discovery,
the user must enter an IP address for the new RAMA /EDFA using the normal E
creation wizard in 1354 RM-PhM.
There is a mechanism to associate a RAMA /EDFA with a network fiber end point
on an 1830 PSS-32 (i.e. an LD external line port). This association is visible in the
1354 RM-PhM topology map.
1354 RM-PhM can retrieve alarms from RAMA /EDFA
•
RAMA /EDFA can be deleted in the same manner as other E’s.
•
•
Non-1354 RM-PhM provisioning of RAMAN or EDFA IP Address
When an IP address for a RAMA or EDFA is provisioned via any E interface, the
1354 RM-PhM either:
1. Initiates a discovery of the network element at that IP address using S MP v1 and
automatically associates it with the appropriate 1830 PSS-32 line in the topology
view, or
2. If the RAMA or EDFA network element already exists in the 1354 RM-PhM from a
previous discovery, the 1354 RM-PhM will automatically associate it with the
appropriate 1830 PSS-32 line in the topology view.
In point 1) above, the triggering of an automatic discovery of RAMA or EDFA network
element does not depend upon 1354 RM-PhM's “Auto Discovery” status. The RAMA
or EDFA network element will be discovered even if auto discovery is disabled or if set to
discovery by traps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-90
System administration
1354 RM-PhM management of Red-C RAMAN Amplifier &
EDFA Booster
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Explicit creation of RAMAN or EDFA NE in 1354 RM-PhM
RAMA /EDFA network elements, which have been manually discovered by the user, are
not automatically assigned to any of the existing 1830 PSS-32 network element’s external
line ports. The user has to manually configure such associations. The user can get a
summarized view of all 1830 PSS-32 Raman/EDFA associations from the Raman/EDFA
association GUI.
Manual association in 1354 RM-PhM topology map
1354 RM-PhM provides an operation via the topology view for the user to explicitly
associate a RAMA or EDFA network element with an 1830 PSS-32 line. If the
associated 1830 PSS-32 line supports the RAMA and EDFA IP address attributes, then
the 1354 RM-PhM automatically provisions the IP address to match the network element
being associated (which would overwrite any previous provisioned value on the 1830
PSS-32 E). For 1830 PSS-32, the 1354 RM-PhM stores the RAMA and EDFA IP
addresses on the 1830 PSS-32 line in the 1354 RM-PhM database only. This information
is lost if the 1830 PSS-32 is deleted from the 1354 RM-PhM and hence must be reentered
manually via the 1354 RM-PhM GUI if the 1830 PSS-32 is later recreated in the 1354
RM-PhM. The RAMA or EDFA IP address is restored upon discovery of the 1830
PSS-32 E.
ote: 1830 PSS-32 Releases 1.x do not support the RAMA or EDFA IP address
attribute on external ports, hence for these releases, the user should employ the
manual association operation via the topology view to explicitly associate a RAMA
or EDFA network element with an 1830 PSS-32 line.
To configure RAMAN and EDFA network elements
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
From the Management Control Panel, select View > RAMA and EDFA Associations...
Result: The RAMA /EDFA Associations GUI is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Select the desired external line port displayed in the association GUI. Either right click or
double click on any cell of the selected row
Result: The Configure RAMA
and EDFA IP address window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Enter the desired RAMA /EDFA IP address and click OK
ote: A user cannot enter an IP address that has been discovered by 1354 RM-PhM
and belongs to an incorrect E type. However, a user can enter a valid IP address
belonging to an incorrect E type, which is not yet discovered by 1354 RM-PhM. In
such a case 1354 RM-PhM tries to discover the RED-C network element, and after
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
2-91
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
System administration
1354 RM-PhM management of Red-C RAMAN Amplifier &
EDFA Booster
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
discovery, raises an internal warning alarm to notify the user of a mismatch between
the expected network element type and the actual network element type. It’s the user’s
responsibility to correct the problem (which will trigger a rediscovery) and clear this
alarm.
Important! When a RAMA /EDFA network element is deleted, 1354 RM-PhM sets
the corresponding IP address on the associated external line port to “ ot Defined”.
For doing this 1354 RM-PhM checks the actual E type of the RED-C E to
determine which IP address (RAMA or EDFA) to be set to “ ot Defined”. So in
case there was a mismatch between the expected and actual E type while
discovering the RED-C network element, then the IP address corresponding to the
actual E type will be set to “ ot Defined”.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
2-92
3
3 onfiguring and navigating
C
the network
Overview
Purpose
This chapter explains how to navigate through the network using the 1354 RM-PhM.
Contents
Types of network views
3-2
Discovering network elements
3-6
Configuring network links
3-14
Showing topological connections
3-16
Configuring the network element and network fiber topology
3-17
Using Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability
3-22
Managing optical power levels
3-23
Using the automatic power management interface
3-29
Managing APS groups
3-37
CLI cut-thru
3-42
TL1 cut-thru
3-43
WebUI cut-thru
3-44
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
3-1
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Configuring and navigating the network
Types of network views
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Types of network views
The 1354 RM-PhM provides the following types of network and equipment views:
•
•
Topology View
Inventory View
•
•
Facility/Connection View
Physical Topology
User help in using the views is provided through mouse-over help text for icons and
attributes and by accessing online help from the Help menu. To create a new window with
the current view, click the “push-pin” icon.
Using the Topology View
The topology view contains locations, managed elements and links. The links provide a
physical view of the network connectivity. It is the responsibility of the user to create the
physical links manually.
The topology view provides a geographic reference for the association of locations and
network elements.
Managed elements include the following:
•
•
network elements and their components (that is, shelves, cards and ports)
locations
Links between locations are created automatically based on whether network elements in
location A are connected to network elements in location B.
The Topology View can also be used to present link connectivity. As connections and
services are created in the network, link associations are created.
Defining the background map
Users can create locations and associate a specific background image to each location.
The 1354 RM-PhM supports GIF and JPG file formats.
Users with the appropriate permission level can select View>Background Image and
specify an URL to an image.
Moving network elements into a location
A network element can be dropped into any location. The network element must be edited
from the Topology view of the 1354 RM-PhM.
It is the user's responsibility to ensure that the network elements are positioned in the
proper location.
As network elements are discovered they are placed into the Main View reference. If the
element has a location identifier and the identifier can be mapped to a current location,
the element is placed automatically into the corresponding location.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
3-2
Configuring and navigating the network
Types of network views
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Understanding link topology
The 1354 RM-PhM supports the following:
•
single fiber can support multiple links
•
•
links can support multiple services
the ability to show physical connectivity on a geographic map
•
the ability to show wavelength connectivity on a geographic map
Using the Inventory View
The Inventory View provides the following capabilities:
•
•
view shelf and card lists and graphics
view and edit card and port attributes
•
•
view power levels on band optical filter or OSC WDM ports
pre-provision a card in a slot (right-click on an empty slot)
To access the Inventory view
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
From the 1354 RM-PhM Topology view, double-click on a network element, or select the
network element and choose Provision > Open Existing Inventory.
The Inventory view is displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Using the Facility/Connection View
The Facility/Connection view provides the following capabilities:
•
list the facilities on a given network element
•
•
view and change the attributes of each facility
view, create, or disconnect cross-connections on facilities
To access the Facility/Connection view
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
From the 1354 RM-PhM Inventory view, Wavelength Tracker view, or Service Tracker
view, navigate to a port and double-click it.
The Facility/Connection view is displayed.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
3-3
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Configuring and navigating the network
Types of network views
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using the Physical Topology
The Physical Topology view displays the fiber connections within the network element,
and to other network elements. Refer to “Configuring the network element and network
fiber topology” (p. 3-17).
To access the Physical Topology view
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
From the 1354 RM-PhM, choose Provision > Physical Topology
The Physical Topology view is displayed.
E....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Using groups
The 1354 RM-PhM allows you to organize the network elements into groups. A network
element can be a member of only one group.
The following group types are supported:
•
Singleton - Used for a single E that is managed independently of its Topological
Link connectivity to other Es. It may be a member of a ring that is managed by a
number of EMSes. It is acceptable for an EMS to represent all Es as being in
Singleton subnetworks regardless of the actual network configuration. A singleton
subnetwork does not contain internal topological links.
•
Chain - Used for two or more Es that are managed by the same EMS and are
connected by Topological Links in a chain.
Path Switched Ring (PSR) - Used for two or more Es that are managed by the same
EMS and are connected by Topological Links in a ring that is capable of supporting
Subnetwork Connection protection. (for example UPSR, S CP Ring)
Shared Protection Ring (SPRing) - Used for two or more Es that are managed by the
same EMS and are connected by Topological Links in a complete ring that supports
Shared Line Protection (for example BLSR).
•
•
•
•
•
OpenPSR - Used for two or more Es of a PSR (but not the entire ring) that are
managed by the same EMS (for example Open UPSR).
OpenSPRing - Used for two or more Es of a SPRing (but not the entire ring) that are
managed by one EMS (for example Open BLSR).
Mesh - Used to cover an arbitrary set of two or more Es that are not covered by any
other type.
ote: Specifying a group type does not enforce any rules upon the network elements
or topology with that group.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
3-4
Configuring and navigating the network
Types of network views
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To create a group
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
In the Topology tree window, select the group in which you want the new group to be
created.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Choose File> ew Group.
The Create a new group window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Specify a name for the group.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
From the Subnet Type drop-down menu, choose a subnet type.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
Click OK.
The new group is added as a folder to the tree view.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To assign a network element to a group
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
There are two methods to assign a network element to a group.
•
•
For an existing network element, in the Topology tree view, drag and drop the
network element from one group into the desired group.
For an undiscovered network element, select the desired group and then choose
File> ew E. The network element is discovered and placed into the group.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
3-5
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Configuring and navigating the network
Discovering network elements
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Discovering network elements
In order for the 1354 RM-PhM to manage a network element, it must first “discover” the
elements in the network. Use this procedure when:
•
starting up the first 1354 RM-PhM client with a newly installed 1354 RM-PhM server
•
new network elements have been added to the network
ote: A network element should be managed by only one 1354 RM-PhM server (a
1354 RM-PhM configured with redundant servers is considered to be a single server
in this case). Having a network element managed by two different servers may cause
synchronization problems between the network element and the servers.
ote: If a network element is discovered with a name of the format " Ename :
IPAddress", this means that this E is a duplicate of a previously discovered E (i.e.
there is already an E with " Ename") and the newly discovered E should be
deleted from the 1354 RM-PhM by the user. This scenario could happen when an E
association for a given IP address is deleted by the user and then that IP address is
used to manually discover the E via the Create E wizard.
To discover a network element
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
From the 1354 RM-PhM Topology View, choose File > ew E.
The Create ew E (Step 1) window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
In the E Detail section, specify the following items:
1. In the EType field, the system automatically enters the default E type. If the E
type is known, you can select it from the drop-down list, otherwise the 1354 RM-PhM
automatically discovers the correct E type.
2. To enable Request Timeout, check its check box, and then specify a time-out time in
the field provided.
3. To enable Request Queue Size, check its check box, and then specify a queue size in
the field provided.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Click ext.
The Create ew E (Step 2) window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
3-6
Configuring and navigating the network
Discovering network elements
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
In the Keep Alives section:
1. To enable “Send after connection idle for”, check its check box, and then specify a
time in the field provided.
Then specify a time for the Interval between keep alives in the field provided.
2. To enable “Report error after”, check its check box, and then specify the number of
failures to allow before reporting an error.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
From the Transport Layer drop-down menu (if enabled), choose the transport layer type.
For Alcatel-Lucent Es, choose S MP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6
From the Protocol drop-down menu (if enabled), choose the protocol type. For
Alcatel-Lucent Es, choose S MP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7
If enabled, check Show all parameters to display the parameters for the E.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8
If enabled, check Create all associations to have the 1354 RM-PhM create all of the
associations based on the chosen parameters.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9
In the Associations Parameters section, specify the following items:
1. In the RemoteHost ame field, specify the IP address of the network element. This is
either the IP address of the management port on the network element, or the loopback
IP address of the network element.
2. In the RemotePortnumber field, type the S MP port on the network element through
which to communicate. The default value is 161.
3. In the ProtocolVersion field, from the drop-down menu choose the S MP version to
use. For the 1696 ROADM and 1830 PSS choose v2c (S MPv3 is supported by 1696
ROADM R5.4 and 1830 PSS R2.0.0 as well).
•
•
In the GetCommunity field, type the S MP read community identifier of the
network element(s) you are discovering. ormally the default value is used.
Contact your service representative for the default value to use.
In the SetCommunity field, type the S MP write community identifier of the
network element(s) you are discovering. ormally the default value is used.
Contact your service representative for the default value to use.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
Click Finish.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
3-7
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Configuring and navigating the network
Discovering network elements
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The network element is added to the 1354 RM-PhM Topology View, and the system
collects the latest inventory information from the network element. This may take a few
minutes.
E....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To auto-discover a network element
ote: The auto-discovery function provides two methods for the 1354 RM-PhM to
automatically discover network elements. The 1354 RM-PhM can automatically
discover Es:
•
From which it receives trap messages. When the 1354 RM-PhM receives a trap
from an undiscovered network element, it attempts to discover that E (for the
1354 RM-PhM to receive traps from a network element, the 1354 RM-PhM must
be registered as a trap destination for the network element. To register the 1354
RM-PhM as a trap destination, refer to 1830 PSS-32 CLI Reference Guide.
•
For network element loopback addresses which are detected during network
topology discovery. When the 1354 RM-PhM detects a new loopback address, it
attempts to discover that E.
If the 1354 RM-PhM successfully discovers the new E, it adds the network
element to the topology view and begins to manage it. If the 1354 RM-PhM
cannot successfully discover a network element, it adds the network element to a
list of network elements which it no longer tries to discover (thus saving
processing resources).
Auto-discovery by Trap is supported for S MP v3. If the received trap is S MP
v3 then S MP v3 will be used to discover the E.
The Auto-Discovery GUI allows a user to configure the S MP v3 login parameters
for S MP v3 login during discovery by trap. These fields are:
•
•
Username
Authentication algorithm
•
•
•
Authentication password
Privacy algorithm
Privacy password
When a E is discovered by trap, then subsequently that E is managed using the
same version of S MP as the original trap.
Auto-discovery by topology is supported for S MP v3. If the existing E is being
managed by S MP v3 then S MP v3 will be used to discover the new E using the
same S MP v3 parameters as the existing E.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
3-8
Configuring and navigating the network
Discovering network elements
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
When a network element, E(x), is discovered by topology based on a topological
link to another network element, E(y), (which must already be discovered) then
PhM will attempt to manage E(x) using the same S MP version as it is using to
manage E(y).
When a E is discovered by topology or it is manually created, the version of S MP
that was used to create the S MP association will be used to create a trap destination
on the E.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
From the 1354 RM-PhM Topology View, choose Maintenance > Auto Discovery.
The Auto Discovery attributes window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Choose one of the following auto-discovery options:
•
Disable auto discovery - no network elements are automatically discovered
•
•
Discover by IP
Discover by trap
ote: To discover by IP, you must first manually create at least one E using the
procedure “To discover a network element” (p. 3-6). Then the 1354 RM-PhM server
will discover the other Es in the network topology by traversing the external ports
on the initial E.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Check that the network element that you want to auto-discover is not already in the
auto-discovery list. In the Test IP: field, type the IP address of the network element, or IP
address range, that you intend to add to the auto-discovery list. Click Test.
A dialog is displayed informing you whether or not the address you entered is already on
the auto-discovery list. If it is, you do not need to add it. If it is not, continue at the next
step.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
3-9
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Configuring and navigating the network
Discovering network elements
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
Specify which network elements to auto-discover:
•
•
To enable auto-discovery for all network elements, leave the list blank.
To enable auto-discovery for a particular network element, click the Add button. You
are prompted to specify the IP address and mask for the network element. For the
mask, specify 255.255.255.255. Click OK. The network element's IP address is added
to the auto-discovery list.
•
To enable auto-discovery for a range of IP addresses, click the Add button. You are
prompted to specify the IP address and mask.
In the IP address field, type only enough of the IP address to define the range of IP
addresses to discovery, for example 12.3.1.0
In the Mask field, type 255.255.255.0
This combination allows the 1354 RM-PhM to automatically discover any network
elements with an IP address in the range of 12.3.1.xxx
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
Click OK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6
Close the Auto Discovery attributes window.
E....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To rediscover a network element with a new database
Use this procedure to rediscover a network element that has had its database deleted, or
restored from backup. This procedure is the same as discovering a network element,
except that in this case you must first delete the network element from the 1354
RM-PhM. Deleting a network element does not delete services that end on or traverse the
deleted network element. The services remain operational, but are no longer managed by
the 1354 RM-PhM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
From the 1354 RM-PhM Topology View, select the network element.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Right-click on the network element and choose Delete.
A dialog box asks you to confirm the delete command.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Click Yes.
The network element is deleted from the 1354 RM-PhM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
3-10
Configuring and navigating the network
Discovering network elements
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
Rediscover the network element using the procedure “To discover a network element”
(p. 3-6).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To reconcile a network element
Use this procedure to reconcile previously discovered network elements. This operation is
normally performed automatically by the 1354 RM-PhM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
From the 1354 RM-PhM Topology View, select the network element.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Right-click on the network element and choose Provision > Open Existing Inventory.
The Inventory view for the selected network element is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Click the Refresh button.
The latest inventory information is retrieved from the network element's database and the
1354 RM-PhM database is updated.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Keeping the 1354 RM-PhM in sync with the NEs
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
A network element with a black “X” superimposed on the E icon in the tree window of
the topology view of the 1354 RM-PhM, indicates a communication or synchronization
failure between the 1354 RM-PhM and the network element. To clear the black “X” from
the network element, perform a manual resync of the E. Select the E, and click the
Resynchronize button.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To change the loopback or DCN port IP address of a network element
ote: This procedure should not be used during normal operation. Changing the
loopback IP address causes the network element to undergo a warm reset.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
3-11
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Configuring and navigating the network
Discovering network elements
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This procedure allows you to change the loopback IP address, or the DC port address, of
a network element without having to rediscover the network element and without
interrupting service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Select the network element in the topology view, right-click and choose Properties.
The Properties window for the network element is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Click the Associations tab.
The associations are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Click the Add button.
The Create Association window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
In the RemoteHost ame field, specify the new loopback or DC port IP address, and
then click Finish.
A warning is displayed that the 1354 RM-PhM cannot communicate using this new IP
address. This is normal since the new IP address is not yet active.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
Deselect the Reconnect on Failure check box for the old loopback or DC port IP
address.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6
Click OK to save the properties.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7
Using the CLI, change the IP address (see the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS CLI Command
Guide).
•
•
•
Changing the loopback IP address causes the network element to undergo a warm
reset.
Cross connection identifiers are automatically updated on all Es in the network.
As the updates are occurring, duplicate wave key alarms are raised.
The 1354 RM-PhM detects the E resetting and reconnects to it using the new IP
address.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
3-12
Configuring and navigating the network
Discovering network elements
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8
On the 1354 RM-PhM, delete the old loopback or DC port IP address by doing the
following:
1. Select the network element in the topology view, right-click and choose Properties.
The Properties window for the network element is displayed.
2. Click the Associations tab.
The associations are displayed.
3. Select the old loopback or DC port IP address in the table, and click Delete.
A dialog box asks you to confirm the delete command.
4. Click Yes.
5. Click OK to save the properties
Updates are completed and alarms are automatically cleared within several minutes.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To add a network element into an existing network
Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 Installation and System Turn-up Guide for this
procedure.
To delete a network element
Refer to the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 Installation and System Turn-up Guide for this
procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
3-13
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Configuring and navigating the network
Configuring network links
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuring network links
The only type of link that can be created by the user is the fiber link. All other link types
are created and discovered automatically by the 1354 RM-PhM.
To configure a topological connection from the Topology view
Use this procedure to add a topological connection to the network.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
In the 1354 RM-PhM Topology view, select the network elements between which you
want to create a connection.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Click the topological connection button.
The Create Topological Connection window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
For each of the network elements, use the drop-down menu to choose the port to which to
connect.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
Click OK.
The connection is created and is displayed on the map.
E....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To configure a topological connection from the Physical Topology view
Use this procedure to add a topological connection to the network.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
In the 1354 RM-PhM Physical Topology view, select a network element from the tree
view.
The cards and ports on the network element are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Select the fiber start point port. The port identifier is displayed in the Fiber Start Point
field.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
In the tree view, select the next network element.
The cards and ports on the network element are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
3-14
Configuring and navigating the network
Configuring network links
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
Select the fiber end point port. The port identifier is displayed in the Fiber End Point
field.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
Click the Connect Fiber Endpoints icon.
The connection is created and is displayed in the Topology view.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
3-15
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Configuring and navigating the network
Showing topological connections
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Showing topological connections
Use this procedure to list the topological connections for a network element. This
includes SO ET wavelength, control network, and OSC control network links.
To show topological connections
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
In the 1354 RM-PhM Topology view, select a network element.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Click the Display Topological Connections icon.
The Topological Connections window is displayed with the connections to that network
element listed.
E....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To automatically switch protected services off of a link
Use this procedure to switch protected services off of a link between two network
elements.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Select the link off of which you want to switch services:
•
In the 1354 RM-PhM Topology view, select the link off of which you want to switch
services, and click Properties.
The Topological connections window is displayed. In the Topological connections
window select the link off of which you want to switch services, and click Move
Traffic.
•
In the 1354 RM-PhM Physical Topology view, select the fiber off of which you want
to switch services, and click Move Traffic.
The 1354 RM-PhM displays a list of any unprotected services on the link that cannot be
moved off automatically. You must move these services manually.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Click ext.
The 1354 RM-PhM displays a list of protected services on the link that can be moved off
automatically.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Click Finish.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
3-16
Configuring and navigating the network
Showing topological connections
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The 1354 RM-PhM performs a protection switch on the protected services.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuring the network element and network fiber topology
Before you can provision services in the network, you must define the network fiber
topology. The fiber topology defines how the network element interfaces are connected
using optical fibers. The network element uses this information as follows:
•
to simplify service provisioning. With the topology defined, the network element
knows which ports a channel passes through as it traverses the network element. This
knowledge allows you to provision a service by specifying only the service endpoints
on each E through which the service passes. The E then uses the topology
definition to propagate the values to the other ports on the E through which the
service passes.
•
to enable automated power management. Power management allows you to balance
channel ingress and egress powers to simplify troubleshooting.
to allow you to view the fiber connectivity remotely.
•
For a particular interface (shelf, slot, and port) you can specify that the interface is:
•
•
connected to another interface (shelf, slot, and port) on the network element
connected to an external interface, either within or outside of the 1696 ROADM and
1830 PSS network
•
unconnected
To define the network topology, you first configure the fiber topology on each of the
network elements in the network. After you have defined the topology on all of the
network elements, you connect the external interfaces on each of the network elements to
create the network.
Channel spacing rules for 10G channels adjacent to 40G channels
Channels +/- 50GHz from a 40G signal may not be used unless the 40G signal has passed
through an ITLB or a 50GhZ WSS (drop <or thru> direction of a CWR8-88). The
restrictions include the following:
1. If the 40G demand enters through a colorless port (CLS) on the CWR8-88, then the
E will block 10G channels from being allowed on the adjacent (50GHz away)
channels for the same optical line as the 40G channel. This restriction applies to add,
mesh, and thru channels at this node only. The restriction is limited to the node at
which the 40G channel is added colorlessly. The remainder of the path is not restricted
until it possibly passes through a regeneration location. If the 40G channel is added
colorlessly at both ends, then the restriction occurs for the optical lines at each end of
the demand.
2. For 40G demands - there are no restrictions on neighbor channels 100GHz away.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
3-17
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Configuring and navigating the network
Configuring the network element and network fiber
topology
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3. If the 40G demand enters through a SFD44/ITLB/CWR8-88, then there is no
restriction on neighbor (50GHz away) channels.
4. If the 40G demand enters through a SFD44/CWR8 or through a colorless port (CLS)
on the CWR8, then the E will block channels from being allowed on the adjacent
(50GHz away) channels for the length of the demand route in the network until after it
passes thru the 50GHz WSS on the CWR8-88, or passes thru an ITLB.
If the 40G demand makes a mesh connection from a CWR8 towards a CWR8-88 (it is
a mesh add channel at the CWR8-88), then the E will block 10G channels from
being allowed on the adjacent (50GHz away) channels for the same CWR8-88 optical
line as the 40G channel. This restriction applies to add, mesh, and thru channels at this
node. There would be no restrictions further down the route until the next
regeneration location.
Bidirectional single-fiber transmission
Some applications require bidirectional transmission over a single fiber. Bidirectional
single fiber transmission is achieved via the PhM by creating 2 unidirectional services
between the same client ports (one in the A to Z direction, one in the Z to A direction).
A PSS-32 FOADM CWDM node can be configured to support bidirectional transmission
over a single fiber using CWDM filters. Each bidirectional transmission requires different
CWDM wavelengths in each direction. This is accomplished with 2 fiber connections
(transmit and receive) from the OT to two adjacent wavelengths connections on the MUX
(in) side of the filter. The wavelengths pass between the MUX side of the filter and the
OMD out port in both the receive and transmit directions. The single fiber connected to
the OMD out port carries signals in both directions on their assigned wavelengths.
Bidirectional transmission over a single fiber is supported with any of the following
filters and OTs:
•
•
•
SFC-2(A, B, C, or D)
SFC-4(A or B)
SFC-8
•
•
4DPA4
11STAR1
•
11STMM10
For additional details regarding bidirectional single-fiber transmission, see the
Alcatel-Lucent Product Information and Planning Guide.
Configuring the fiber topology on a network element
To configure the fiber topology on a network element, you use the physical topology view
to select and connect the interfaces. You do not need to configure any unconnected
interfaces. External interfaces are configured using the topology view (see “Connecting
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
3-18
Configuring and navigating the network
Configuring the network element and network fiber
topology
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
the network element external interfaces” (p. 3-20)). If you make a mistake, or are
reconfiguring the network element, you can disconnect two previously connected
interfaces.
To connect two interfaces on the network element
Refer to the cabling diagram for the network element when performing this procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Select the network element you want to configure and click the Physical Topology icon.
A shelf view of the network element is displayed in a new window, showing the current
configuration. Any currently configured connections are displayed in green text below the
interface name.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Select the two interfaces you want to connect and click on the connect icon. (To unselect
an interface, press and hold the CTRL key and click the interface).
The shelf, slot, and port of the interface to which the interface is connected is added in
green text below the interface name, and a line connecting the two points is added to the
display to represent the physical fiber.
Unidirectional connections can be configured for the following port combinations, against
the 1830 PSS-32 E type only:
•
CWR8 CLS port to 4DPA4 line port
•
•
CWR8-88 CLS port to 4DPA4 line port
SFD shelf or card channel port to 4DPA4 line port
The user can connect ports together unidirectionally by selecting the ends and then using
the “Uni-Connect” toolbar icon or right clicking and selecting “Uni-Connect”. On a port
selection that supports unidirectional topology, the green line indicates Connected To port
and the Orange line indicates the Connected From Port. Arrow mark indicates the
direction in which the light flows.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To disconnect two interfaces on the network element
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
In the physical topology view, select the two interfaces you want to disconnect and click
on the disconnect icon.
The line representing the fiber and the green text indicating the shelf, slot, and port of the
interface to which the interface was connected is removed from the display.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
3-19
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Configuring and navigating the network
Configuring the network element and network fiber
topology
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Connecting the network element external interfaces
A network element external interface can connect to another network element in the 1696
ROADM and 1830 PSS network, or it can connect to a client interface external to the
1696 ROADM and 1830 PSS network. After configuring the network element topology,
use the topology view to select and connect external interfaces on a pair of network
elements.
To connect the external interfaces on two network elements within the 1696
ROADM and 1830 PSS network
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Choose Provision > Physical Topology and select one of the network elements you want
to connect. Hold down the CTRL or Shift key when selecting the second network
element.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Click on the icon that allows you to add a topological connection between two Es.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Select OTS from the Rate field scroll list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
Select, from the scroll list for each network element, the interfaces you want to connect.
The list of available interfaces includes all unconnected interfaces that match the selected
rate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
Enter a label for the connection in the Label field.
E....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To determine the network element connectivity across the network
Double-click on the external connection.
Performing a light path trace
The 1354 RM-PhM can display the path of a selected channel through the 1696 ROADM
and 1830 PSS network.
To perform a light path trace
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
In the Physical Topology view, select an interface port on a card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
3-20
Configuring and navigating the network
Configuring the network element and network fiber
topology
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Click the Begin a lightpath trace icon.
•
•
If you selected a single-channel port, the light path for that channel is displayed as a
series of lines from interface to interface.
If you selected an interface that can have multiple channels, a list of all of the bands
and channels that are applicable to that interface is displayed, whether or not they are
active. Select the desired band and channel from the list and click OK. The light path
is displayed as a series of lines from interface to interface.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
To clear the light path trace, click the Clear the lightpath trace icon.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
3-21
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Configuring and navigating the network
Using Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability
The Wavelength Tracker™ capability allows you to locate and manage services and
equipment using Wave Key or band and channel information.
To use the Wavelength Tracker capability
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
From the 1354 RM-PhM, choose View > Wave Key Encoder Lookup....
The Wavelength Tracker window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Specify the search criteria. You can search on Wave Keys, or you can specify the band
and channel. Click Retrieve.
Items that match the specified criteria are displayed in a list beside the search criteria. The
Wavelength Tracker window offers the following capabilities:
•
•
•
display the list of equipment on which keys are encoded, enabled, or detected
display WDM port in/out optical power measurements
display cross-connects on CTPs
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
3-22
Configuring and navigating the network
Managing optical power levels
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Managing optical power levels
To display optical power levels along a service path
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
In the 1354 RM-PhM Topology View, select a network element.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Click the Wavelength Services icon.
The Wavelength Services window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
In the Wavelength Services window, select a service and click one of the following icons:
•
Power (A-Z)
•
Power (Z-A)
The power trace window is displayed similar to that shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-1 Uni-directional light path power window
ote: Each of the detection points listed in the power window are “live”. To open the
Facility/Connection view for a detection point, double-click it.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
To refresh the power measurements manually, click the Refresh icon
.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
3-23
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Configuring and navigating the network
Managing optical power levels
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To refresh the power measurements automatically, check the Auto Refresh check box, and
use the slider to specify the refresh rate in seconds.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
To use the automatic power management capability, refer to “To manage power levels
along a light path” (p. 3-34).
E....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To display optical power levels at a Wavelength Tracker detection point
ote: Wavelength Tracker detection points are located on the following ports:
For 1830 PSS:
•
•
ALPHG – Line In, DCM To, Sig Out
AHPHG – Line In, DCM To, Sig Out
•
•
CWR8 – CLS{1-8} In, CLS{1-8} Out, OMD In, Sig In, Sig Out, Thru Out
OPS – SP Input, SW Input 1, SW Input 2
For 1696R:
•
•
MSA - AMP I , MSA OUT, AMP OUT
OSC - WDM I and WDM OUT
•
•
BOF - WDM I and WDM OUT
BBAs - AMP I and AMP OUT
•
•
•
ROADM - WDM I and THRU OUT
WSS
PPS - A and B I
The following 1696R Wavelength Tracker detection points are located on the WSS
card:
•
•
•
WDM I
WDM OUT
BB I
•
•
THRU OUT
ADD/DROP I
•
ADD/DROP OUT
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Right click on a power bar in the lightpath power trace window and select “All channel
powers”.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
3-24
Configuring and navigating the network
Managing optical power levels
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: Optical power levels are displayed:
Figure 3-2 Optical power levels at a Wavelength Tracker detection point
ote: Each of the detection points listed in the power window are “live”. To open
the Facility/Connection view for a detection point, double-click it.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
To refresh the power measurements manually, click Refresh.
To refresh the power measurements automatically, check the Auto Refresh check box, and
use the slider to specify the refresh rate in seconds.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
To save the power values in this window to a file, click the Export button.
Specify a directory and filename for the file. The power values are saved to a comma
separated value (CSV) file which can be imported into a spreadsheet for easy viewing.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
To use the automatic power adjustment capability, refer to “To manage power levels at an
ingress or egress monitor point” (p. 3-31).
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
3-25
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Configuring and navigating the network
Managing optical power levels
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Setting the expected power directly in the lightpath trace
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
From the lightpath trace, the expected power can be set by selecting the zed bar by left
mouse click and then dragging the zed bar to a new power level. Release the left mouse
button to set the new expected power level.
E....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Setting the expected power and deviation using the facility/connection view
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Open the facility/connection view for a node by selecting the node in the topology view
of the PhM and right clicking. Then choose Provisioning > Facility / connection.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Select the port of interest and expand the drop down list to show the channel list. Select
the channel of interest by left mouse click.
Result: The Details box to the right shows the attributes for this channel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Change the expected power by entering a new value in the Out/In Expected Power (dBm)
box.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
Change the expected power deviation by entering a new value in the Out/In Expected
Power Dev (dB).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
Click Apply.
E....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Setting the expected power navigating from the inventory view
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Open the inventory view for a node by selecting the node in the topology view of the
PhM and right clicking. Then choose Provisioning > Open Existing Inventory.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Select the pack of interest and expand the drop down list to show port list. Select the port
of interest by left mouse click and then right mouse click and select Optical Power Mgmt
> Optical Power Mgmt In/Out
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
3-26
Configuring and navigating the network
Managing optical power levels
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The WT measured power level for each channel is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Left mouse click the zed bar for a channel and drag it to a new power level. Release the
left mouse button to set the new power level.
ote: The same screen can be reached by right mouse clicking a power bar in the
lightpath trace and selecting All Channel Powers
ote: The expected power and deviation can only be set directly by the user for detect
points that are Manually power managed. The power management type is noted above
the power bars in the lightpath trace.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To configure WaveKey expected power levels and Deviations along a lightpath from the lightpath
trace
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Open a lightpath trace for a service in one direction.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
To synchronize the expected power levels to the current measured power levels click the
icon above the lightpath trace with a key and small bars below it.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Confirm you want to set the expected powers and the expected powers are reset.
ote: Only the expected powers at Manually power managed detect points will be set.
Important! You should only set the expected power levels if you have adjusted the
lightpath power levels to match the planned power levels for the service. If you
synchronize the power levels before making power adjustments, you may not notice
that the service follows an incorrect power profile along its path.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
To set expected power deviations along a service, click the icon above the lightpath trace
with a key and a small + and – above and below the key, respectively.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
Enter a value to apply to all detect points and click OK.
ote: It is normal for the set to fail at auto power managed detect points because it is
not possible to set the deviation directly for these points. Also, the deviation should
not be set lower than 2.5 dB, normally, to avoid causing power out of range alarms
when power levels change due to normal network operations such as service
provisioning and deletion.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
3-27
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Configuring and navigating the network
Managing optical power levels
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
3-28
Configuring and navigating the network
Using the automatic power management interface
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using the automatic power management interface
How power management is configured
Every port in a network element has a power management type setting. Ports connected to
external are configurable by the user, to either automatic or manual. When the external
ports are set, all of the internal port settings are set by the network element to be the same
as the external port setting, according to the intranode topology connections. Lines
connected across the through path must have matching power management types.
Therefore, when an external port is set to automatic, all ports along the network element
are automatically power managed.
Ports whose topology can be set to external and support power management type Auto
are:
•
1696R: OSC pack WDM Out/In
•
1830: LD pack Line Out/In
Any other ports whose topology is connected to external must be set to power
management type Manual. When a port is changed to external, its power management
type setting changes to Auto if it is an 1830 LD Line port, otherwise the port power
management type remains unchanged. When a port is changed to internal, the mode
setting reverts to the correct value based on the setting of the external ports.
For 1696R, the OSC WDM ports default to connected to external, and the default power
management type is Auto. The user can change the type to Manual.
For 1830, the LD Line ports of a pack equipped with an OSC channel default to
connected to external, and the default power management type is Auto. The user can
change the type to Manual.
The power management type of a port connected to external can be changed in the 1354
PhM inventory view of the port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
3-29
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Configuring and navigating the network
Using the automatic power management interface
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
How Auto power management operates
The goal of automatic power management is to get the power levels of all channels
entering or leaving a network element to be within a defined target range. Target power
ranges are specified at the monitor points of the network element:
•
•
1696R:
– ingress monitor point –ingress BBA/MSA AMP OUT port
– egress monitor point – last OUT port on the network element to which the
network fiber is connected (OSC WDM Out)
1830:
– ingress monitor point – ingress LD SIG OUT
– egress monitor point - last OUT port on the network element to which the network
fiber is connected (reverse direction ingress LD LI E OUT)
The network element power management adjusts the power levels of each channel as
necessary to achieve the target power levels at the monitor points. Adjustment of locally
added channels is automatic. Spectral equalization through WSS/CWR8 pack Thru or
CLS ports is automatic. Changes to Amp/LD gain settings must be triggered by running
the Ingress Adjustment or Egress Adjustment function. For more details on automatic
power management refer to the 1830 PSS-32 User Provisioning Guide and 1830 PSS-32
Installation and System Turn-up Guide.
The 1354 RM-PhM provides user control of the 1696 ROADM and 1830 PSS platform
power management capabilities. The 1354 RM-PhM allows the operator to:
•
adjust gain on ingress amps
– adjust the gain on the ingress amp to calculate a new gain based on all known
wavelengths
– set expected powers for detect points associated with the ingress portion of the
line
–
•
•
the gain can be adjusted on a manual point. On an autopower managed point, the
gain is calculated by the E during an adjustment.
adjust the egress point
– adjusts power along the path from the ROADM/WSS/CWR8 card thru port, the
egress LD/amp, to the egress point; sets the egress LD gain.
1830:
– Modifies the CWR8 Thru, and mesh connected CWR8 CLS port channel powers
by adjusting the EVOA settings and expected powers.
–
Modifies the SVAC output power target, or OT output power target, and CWR8
Sig Out power target to achieve the target output power of the egress line.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
3-30
Configuring and navigating the network
Using the automatic power management interface
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
•
1696R:
– Modifies the WSS/ROADM, and WSS mesh connected WSS drop port channel
powers by adjusting the EVOA settings and expected powers.
–
•
Modifies the COFs’, CADs’, and transponder output power target, and WSS
WDM Out power target to achieve the target output power of the egress line
manual setting of the egress LD gain, and the setpoints for the ROADM/WSS/CWR8,
and COF/CAD, OT, SVAC are allowed for a manual line.
– Modify power management attributes for ingress and egress adjustment points.
The PhM provides interfaces to:
•
sync power at network element Wavelength Tracker detect points
–
•
•
syncing power sets the expected power to the present power of all detection points
on the through-path
– only on manual points
modify the power management attributes for ingress LDs and egress monitor points
that are manually managed
–
set the target power
–
set the minimum and maximum gain for the amps
– set the WT deviation default (1830 only)
manage spectrum at a power management point
–
set the expected power for an individual wavelength (only on manual)
–
set the default per channel expected at a single detection point (only on manual)
The power management functions for auto power managed are accessed from the
inventory and facility views under the menu option “Optical Power Mgmt”. Also, menus
are available on the lightpath trace charts for:
•
1696R:
–
•
Ingress adjustment at ingress amp pack Amp Out ports; Egress adjustment at
egress OSC pack WDM Out ports.
1830:
–
Ingress adjustment at ingress LD pack Sig Out ports; Egress adjustment at egress
(reverse) ingress LD Line Out ports.
To manage power levels at an ingress or egress monitor point
Use this procedure to manage the power levels at a power management ingress or egress
point.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
3-31
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Configuring and navigating the network
Using the automatic power management interface
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Locate and select the ingress or egress monitor point at which you want to manage the
power levels:
•
ingress monitor point - ingress BBA AMP OUT port (1696R) / ingress LD SIG OUT
port (1830)
•
egress monitor point - last OUT port on the network element to which the network
fiber is connected, OSC WDM OUT port (1696R) / LD LI E OUT port (1830)
Right-click the point and choose Optical Power Mgmt>Power Mgmt Out.
The Power Management window is displayed as seen in the following figures.
Figure 3-3 Ingress monitor point power management window
Figure 3-4 Egress monitor point power management window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
3-32
Configuring and navigating the network
Using the automatic power management interface
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
To view or edit the power management attributes for this monitor point, choose Ingress
Power Mgmt>Edit Ingress, or Egress Power Mgmt>Edit Egress.
The monitor point amp and gain attributes are displayed.
The ingress monitor point is always the ingress LD/amplifier for the network element,
therefore the ingress power amp and gain attributes apply to the this monitor point which
is the ingress LD/amplifier for the network element.
The egress monitor point is the last Out port prior to the fiber span. The power attributes
shown when Egress Power Mgmt>Edit Egress is selected, include the attributes for the
line and the attributes for the egress LD/amplifier, if one is present.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Edit the attributes if desired and click Apply. Close the window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
To adjust power levels based on changes made to the ingress amplifier attributes, choose
Ingress Power Mgmt>Adjust Ingress Power. The system attempts to adjust the ingress
power levels to meet the specifications. This may take a few minutes.
To adjust power levels based on changes made to the egress line attributes, choose Egress
Power Mgmt>Adjust egress Power.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
To refresh the power measurements, click Refresh.
To refresh the power measurements automatically, check the Auto Refresh check box, and
use the slider to specify the refresh rate in seconds.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6
After the system has finished the power adjustment, if the adjustment was successful, the
expected powers will be updated automatically.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7
To save the power values in this window to a file, click the Export button.
Specify a directory and filename for the file. The power values are saved to a comma
separated value (CSV) file which can be imported into a spreadsheet for easy viewing.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
3-33
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Configuring and navigating the network
Using the automatic power management interface
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To manage power levels along a light path
ote: For Wavelength Tracker detection points see “To display optical power levels at
a Wavelength Tracker detection point” (p. 3-24)
Use this procedure to manage the power levels along a light path.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Select the light path. There are two methods:
Method 1
From the 1354 RM-PhM Topology View, select the network element, right-click, and
choose Provision > Inventory.
The Inventory window is displayed.
avigate to the Wavelength Tracker detection point for which you wish to display the
optical power levels.
Select the port, right-click and choose Optical Power Mgmt> Light path power.
A list of channels is displayed.
From the channel list, select the channel for which you which to display power levels, and
click OK.
The power chart for both directions of the light path is displayed as seen in the following
figure.
Figure 3-5 Bi-directional path power trace
Method 2
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
3-34
Configuring and navigating the network
Using the automatic power management interface
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To view all services that traverse a particular network element or set of network elements,
select the network element(s) in the 1354 RM-PhM Topology View, and click the
Wavelength Services icon.
The Wavelength Services window is displayed, listing all services on the selected network
elements.
In the Wavelength Services window, select a service and click one of the following icons:
•
Power (A-Z)
•
Power (Z-A)
The power trace window is displayed similar to that shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-6 Uni-directional light path power window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
To view or edit the power management attributes at this monitor point, choose Ingress
Power Mgmt>Edit Ingress or Egress Power Mgmt>Edit Egress button.
The monitor point amp and gain attributes are displayed.
The ingress monitor point is always the ingress LD/amplifier for the network element,
therefore the ingress power amp and gain attributes apply to the this monitor point which
is the ingress LD/amplifier for the network element.
The egress monitor point is the last Out port prior to the fiber span. The power attributes
shown when “Egress Power Mgmt>Edit Egress” is selected include the attributes for the
line and the attributes for the egress LD/amplifier, if one is present.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
3-35
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Configuring and navigating the network
Using the automatic power management interface
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Edit the attributes, if desired, and click Apply. Close the window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
To adjust power levels based on changes made to the amplifier attributes, choose Ingress
Power Mgmt>Adjust Ingress Power or Egress Power Mgmt>Adjust Output Power. The
system attempts to adjust the power levels to meet the specifications. This may take a few
minutes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
To refresh the power measurements, click Refresh.
To refresh the power measurements automatically, check the Auto Refresh check box, and
use the slider to specify the refresh rate in seconds.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6
Once complete, successfully or not, click the Retrieve button to view information about
the results of the power adjustment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7
After the system has finished the power adjustment, if the adjustment was successful, the
expected powers will be updated automatically.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8
To save the power values in this window to a file, click the Export button.
Specify a directory and filename for the file. The power values are saved to a comma
separated value (CSV) file which can be imported into a spreadsheet for easy viewing.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
3-36
Configuring and navigating the network
Managing APS groups
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Managing APS groups
Automatic protection switch (APS) groups can be managed by the 1354 RM-PhM. APS
groups cannot be created by the 1354 RM-PhM; they are discovered automatically when
they are created by the provisioning of PPS cards or optical splitters. For more
information about APS groups, refer to the 1830 PSS-32 User Provisioning Guide.
APS group Rx/Tx status behavior
The APS group Rx/Tx status follows the following qualifier rules:
Rx status:
•
Active - the selector is selecting this Rx port to receive traffic.
•
•
Standby - traffic received on this port is not used.
Unknown - the working and protection cards are unplugged
Tx status:
•
Active - traffic transmitted on this port is in use.
•
•
Standby - traffic transmitted on this port is not used.
Unknown - the Protect Line is failed, or the far end is not configured, or misfibering
has occurred (such as far end working connected to near end protection). A Tx status
of Unknown also occurs if the working and protection cards are unplugged.
Listing APS groups
There are several methods to view APS groups and their attributes:
•
From the Topology view, select a network element, right-click and choose Provision >
APS Groups. A list of APS groups for the selected network element is displayed.
•
From the Inventory view, select a port or facility that is part of an APS group (as
indicated by an identifier listed in the APS Group ID attribute field), and click the Edit
Automatic Protection Properties button. The APS attributes for that APS group are
displayed.
From the Services window, select a service and click the APS groups button. A list of
APS groups for the selected service is displayed. Alternatively, you can select a
service, click the Details button, and then click the APS Groups tab.
•
•
•
From a Power Management window for a service, click the APS button. A list of APS
groups for the selected service is displayed.
From a Power Management window for a service, in the column for an APS group
member component, right-click and choose Edit APS. The APS attributes for that APS
group are displayed.
The following figure illustrates the APS Views window which lists the APS groups.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
3-37
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Configuring and navigating the network
Managing APS groups
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-7 APS Views window
Editing APS group attributes
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
To edit APS group attributes, select the APS group in the APS Views window and click
the Edit button.
The APS Group attributes window is displayed, as follows:
Figure 3-8 APS Group attributes window
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
3-38
Configuring and navigating the network
Managing APS groups
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Under the Group tab you can modify the following fields:
•
•
Description - a text description of the APS group
Revertive - specifies wether the group reverts back to it original working/protection
configuration after a protection switch has taken place. This attribute operates with the
Wait to Restore attribute.
•
Direction - specifies whether this is a unidirectional or bidirectional APS group. APS
groups using PPS cards are always unidirectional in which case this field is
non-editable. APS groups using optical splitters can be either bidirectional or
unidirectional and can be specified in this field.
Wait to Restore (min) - specifies how long to wait after a protection switch before
attempting to revert back to the original working/protection configuration
•
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
To save your changes click Apply Changes.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To perform a forced or manual protection switch
APS manual and forced protection switching is performed from the APS Group attributes
window.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
In the APS Group attributes window, select either the Working member or the Protection
member in the APS Members list.
•
If you selected the Working member in the APS Members list, you can specify one of
the following protection switch types:
– To perform a forced protection switch, choose Protection Switch>Force Switch to
Protection.
–
•
To perform a manual protection switch, choose Protection Switch>Manual Switch
to Protection.
If you selected the Protection member in the APS Members list, you can specify one
of the following protection switch types:
– To perform a forced protection switch, choose Protection Switch>Force Switch to
Working.
–
To perform a manual protection switch, choose Protection Switch>Manual Switch
to Working.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
You are prompted to confirm the protection switch. Click Yes.
The protection switch is performed, and the APS Members list is updated.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
3-39
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Configuring and navigating the network
Managing APS groups
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Click Close.
E....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To prevent or re-enable automatic protection switching
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
In the APS Group attributes window, select the Protection member in the APS Members
list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
To prevent automatic protection switching, choose Protection Switch> Lockout of
Protection.
To re-enable automatic protection switching that was previously locked out, choose
Protection Switch> Clear Protection Switch.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
You are prompted to confirm the action. Click Yes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
Click Close.
E....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To clear a protection switch
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
In the APS Group attributes window, select the Working or Protection member in the APS
Members list.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Choose Protection Switch> Clear Protection Switch.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
You are prompted to confirm the action. Click Yes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
Click Close.
E....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
3-40
Configuring and navigating the network
Managing APS groups
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To perform a manual protection switch of all protected services on a network fiber
Use this procedure to manually switch all protected services on a network fiber to their
alternate paths. This procedure does not switch or interrupt unprotected services.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
In the Topology view, select the fiber for which you wish to switch all protected services.
Right-click and choose Properties.
The Topological Connection properties window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Select the desired connection, and click Move Traffic.
You are prompted to confirm the protection switch. Click Yes.
The protection switch is performed, and the protected services are switched to their
alternate paths.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Click Close.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
3-41
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Configuring and navigating the network
CLI cut-thru
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CLI cut-thru
The 1354 RM-PhM provides an interface for performing a CLI cut-thru to any managed
element in the network. To perform a CLI telnet cut-thru
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
In the 1354 RM-PhM Topology View or Inventory View, select the object to which you
wish to cut thru.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Choose Cut Thru>CLI Cut Thru.
A CLI telnet session is launched.
ote: When a user requests CLI cut-thru, PhM will use telnet or ssh based on the
E's settings.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
3-42
Configuring and navigating the network
TL1 cut-thru
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TL1 cut-thru
The 1354 RM-PhM provides an interface for performing a TL1 cut-thru to any managed
element in the network.
To perform a TL1 cut-thru
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
In the 1354 RM-PhM Topology View or Inventory View, select the object to which you
wish to cut thru.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Click the TL1 Cut Thru icon and a TLI session is launched.
ote: When the E is in secure mode, the TL1 cut thru icon is disabled in the toolbar.
ote: When a user requests TL1 cut-thru, 1354 RM-PhM will check if the E is
encrypted mode. If it is not then a Telnet TL1 session will be launched. Otherwise, no
TL1 session will be launched
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
3-43
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Configuring and navigating the network
WebUI cut-thru
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WebUI cut-thru
The 1354 RM-PhM provides an interface for performing a WebUI cut-thru to the
network.
To perform a WebUI cut-thru
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
In the 1354 RM-PhM Topology View or Inventory View, Click the WebUI Cut Thru icon
and a WebUI session is launched.
ote: When the E is in secure mode, the WebUI cut thru icon is disabled in the
toolbar.
ote: When a user requests web cut-thru, 1354 RM-PhM will check if the E is
encrypted mode. If it is not, then an http web session will be launched. Otherwise, no
web session will be launched.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
3-44
4
4 onitoring system events
M
and network alarms
Overview
Purpose
This chapter explains how to monitor system events and network alarms.
Contents
Overview of network alarms
4-3
4-3
Opening an alarm window for a managed object or group
4-7
4-7
Acknowledging an alarm
4-9
4-9
Suppressing alarms
4-10
4-10
Clearing an alarm
4-11
4-11
Using the 1354 RM-PhM log view
4-12
4-12
Performance monitoring
4-15
4-15
Starting and stopping PM collection
4-16
Viewing PM data and raw PM data
4-17
Configuring PM and TCA profiles
4-17
Troubleshooting Wavelength Tracker alarms
4-18
4-18
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
4-1
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Monitoring system events and network alarms
Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Determining the source of an alarm
4-19
Determining the WaveKeys used for a service
4-21
Querying the WaveKeys
4-22
Troubleshooting the WaveKey insertion failed alarm
4-23
Troubleshooting the Missing WaveKey alarm
4-24
Troubleshooting the Unexpected WaveKey alarm
4-26
Troubleshooting the Duplicate WaveKey alarm
4-27
Troubleshooting the Invalid WaveKey alarm
4-29
Troubleshooting a power out of range alarm
4-30
4-30
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
4-2
Monitoring system events and network alarms
Overview of network alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview of network alarms
The 1354 RM-PhM provides a network-wide view of the 1696 ROADM and 1830 PSS
network. Events, such as alarms, are trapped and sent from the 1696 ROADM and 1830
PSS network element to the 1354 RM-PhM. The 1354 RM-PhM Topology View provides
an alarm banner and a count of current alarms that have been received by the 1354
RM-PhM. The 1354 RM-PhM Topology View presents a summary of the alarm counts
based on severity, as shown in Figure 4-1, “1354 RM-PhM Topology View” (p. 4-3).
Figure 4-1 1354 RM-PhM Topology View
The alarms presented in the 1354 RM-PhM Topology View window represent only the
alarms currently stored in the 1354 RM-PhM database that have not been cleared, either
manually or automatically. The alarm count is a total count, and includes alarms that are
not displayed due to filter settings.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
4-3
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Monitoring system events and network alarms
Overview of network alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ote: The 1354 RM-PhM Topology View does not maintain any connection with the
current alarm queues on the network element. E alarms can be acknowledged from
the 1354 RM-PhM alarm view without changing the state of the alarm equipment in
the network. It is the responsibility of individual operating companies to determine
the rules and procedures for the use of the Acknowledge function.
Alarms that have been cleared can be viewed in the report manager window. For more
information see “Using the 1354 RM-PhM log view” (p. 4-12).
If a network element has been out of contact, or a trap has been missed, the 1354
RM-PhM attempts to retrieve any missed alarms that are present in the network element's
S MP trap buffer.
Alarms are raised against specific pieces of equipment in the network. The 1354
RM-PhM associates incoming alarms with its persistent view of the network topology.
The topology data that represents a piece of equipment is updated with the alarm counts
for any received alarm. These alarm counts and severities are graphically represented in
the 1354 RM-PhM user interface.
The 1354 RM-PhM provides the network wide view of the 1696 ROADM and 1830 PSS
network. For actions at the nodal level the user can access the craft interface by launching
a telnet cut-thru to the E's command line interface (CLI). Refer to “CLI cut-thru”
(p. 3-42) for further information about launching the CLI from the 1354 RM-PhM.
Managed object alarm counts
The managed object graphic, as seen in the topology map, contains fields indicating the
number of unacknowledged alarms as well as the total number of alarms.
The background color of the alarm count field provides a visual indication of the highest
severity level associated with the nodal alarms.
The alarm state of network elements is propagated to the parent location, where the
location is the geographic container. The alarm state of a location is also propagated to
any containing locations. The location color reflects the highest alarm severity of any of
its contained objects. The maximum severity of any alarm is critical (red). The maximum
severity of any unacknowledged alarm is information (green).
Alarm correlation
1354 RM-PhM alarms are marked as ew until they have been processed by the alarm
correlation function. The 1354 RM-PhM examines the alarms that it receives to determine
if there is a root cause to the alarms. After they have been processed, their status changes
to either Root Cause or Masked. If a common root cause for multiple alarms can be
determined, and if the alarm correlation capability is enabled, the 1354 RM-PhM can
group the related alarms and display only the root alarms. 1354 RM-PhM alarm
correlation works by going through each of the alarms and finding the corresponding
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
4-4
Monitoring system events and network alarms
Overview of network alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
lightpath. For each alarmed lightpath it analyzes its alarms to determine which are root
causes and which are sympathetic (masked) alarms and set the status accordingly. This
reduces the number of alarms that are displayed. The related alarms can also be viewed
by specifying the view options in the Alarm window.
To enable or disable alarm correlation
Use this procedure to turn alarm correlation on or off. Alarm correlation is turned on by
default when the 1354 RM-PhM is installed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
In the 1354 RM-PhM, choose Admin > Settings.
The Settings window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
In the Settings window, click the System Settings tab, and then click the Alarm
Correlation tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
To turn alarm correlation on, check the Enable Alarm Correlation check box.
To turn alarm correlation off, uncheck the Enable Alarm Correlation check box.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Viewing sympathetic alarms
Use this procedure to view alarms that are being masked by a root cause alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
In the Alarm panel of the 1354 RM-PhM Topology View window, select the alarm,
right-click on the alarm and choose Sympathetic alarms. (If the Sympathetic alarms menu
item is greyed-out, then there are no Sympathetic alarms related to the selected alarm.).
An alarm window is displayed, listing the sympathetic alarms.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Alarm list filtering
The fault view can be filtered to show alarms based on severity as well as correlation
state. The filters are accessible from the fault view as buttons on the toolbar.
The Severity filter controls the display of alarms based on the severity of the alarm:
•
•
If selected, show alarms of that severity.
If not selected, do not show alarms of the severity.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
4-5
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Monitoring system events and network alarms
Overview of network alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Cause filter controls the display of alarms based on the cause of the alarm:
•
Root Cause and Unacknowledged
– If selected, show root cause alarms that a user has not acknowledged.
– If not selected, do not show unacknowledged root cause alarms.
•
Root Cause and Acknowledged
– If selected, only show root cause alarms that have been acknowledged.
– If not selected, do not show acknowledged root cause alarms.
Masked
– If selected, show alarms that have a “Correlation State” of “Correlated” and are
acknowledged by the correlation service.
•
–
•
•
If not selected, do not show alarms that have a “Correlation State” of “Correlated”
and are acknowledged by the correlation service.
ew
– If selected, show alarms that have a “Correlation State” of “ ew” and are
acknowledged by the correlation service.
– If not selected, do not show alarms that have a “Correlation State” of “ ew” and
are acknowledged by the correlation service.
1354 RM-PhM
– If selected, show alarms that have been raised by the 1354 RM-PhM itself.
– If not selected, do not show alarms that have been raised by the 1354 RM-PhM.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
4-6
Monitoring system events and network alarms
Opening an alarm window for a managed object or group
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Opening an alarm window for a managed object or
group
Use this procedure to open an alarm window for a managed object or a group. An alarm
window can be opened from any view (topology or inventory) by selecting the object or
group, right-clicking, and choosing Faults.
Fault views may also be opened based on equipment. From the main topology view a
fault view can be opened to show faults on a single E or on a group. From the inventory
or facility view a fault view can be opened to show faults on a particular card, port, or
channel. The filters are also applied to the scoped fault view.
To open an alarm window for a managed object
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
In the 1354 RM-PhM Topology View, navigate to the desired managed object or group
and select it.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Right-click and choose Fault.
The Alarms window is displayed showing alarms associated only with the selected object
or group.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Using the Alarms Filters buttons, specify the severities and cause conditions that you wish
to view.
•
Root Cause - displays the alarms that are considered root alarms, or alarms which
have no correlation to other alarms
•
Masked - displays the alarms which are correlated to root alarms and which are not
displayed when the Root Cause option is selected
ew - displays alarms that have arrived and which have not yet been processed by
alarm correlation
•
To view all of the alarms correlated to a root alarm, unselect the Masked view option.
Select one of the root alarms, right-click and choose Lightpath faults. A list of the alarms
along that lightpath are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
To view details of an alarm, double-click it.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
4-7
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Monitoring system events and network alarms
Opening an alarm window for a managed object or group
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Alarm Details window is displayed.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
4-8
Monitoring system events and network alarms
Acknowledging an alarm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Acknowledging an alarm
The Alarm Window displays information about and allows the acknowledgement of
received alarm-level events.
Impact
Acknowledging an alarm does not provide any corrective action. It only indicates that
someone is aware of the alarm and presumably that some action is taking place to resolve
the alarm condition.
ote: Before activating the software on an E after a software download, all
non-software loading alarms must be set to Acknowledged.
To acknowledge an alarm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
In the Alarm panel of the 1354 RM-PhM Topology View window, select one or more
alarms, right-click on the alarm(s) and choose Acknowledge.
A check mark appears for the alarm(s) in the ACK column of the alarm window.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
4-9
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Monitoring system events and network alarms
Suppressing alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Suppressing alarms
Use this procedure to suppress alarms from a selected E. This is useful for preventing a
flood of alarms when the selected E is undergoing maintenance.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
To inhibit alarms, in the 1354 RM-PhM Topology View, select the network element, and
then choose Fault > Inhibit TL1 Messages.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
To resume receiving alarms, select the network element, and then choose Fault > Release
TL1 Message inhibition.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
4-10
Monitoring system events and network alarms
Clearing an alarm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Clearing an alarm
Use this procedure to clear a 1354 RM-PhM originated alarm from the 1354 RM-PhM
alarm window.
Impact
This procedure only clears the alarms from the 1354 RM-PhM alarm window that
originate from the 1354 RM-PhM. The manual action of clearing an alarm does not imply
that the original problem is fixed. It is up to the maintenance personnel to determine when
it is appropriate to clear an alarm. Alarms that originate from a network element cannot be
cleared from the alarm window. Once the cause of an E-originated alarm is corrected,
the alarm is removed from the alarm window automatically.
To clear an alarm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
In the Alarm panel of the 1354 RM-PhM Topology View window, right-click on the
alarm(s) and choose Clear.
The selected alarm are removed from the alarm window.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
4-11
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Monitoring system events and network alarms
Using the 1354 RM-PhM log view
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Using the 1354 RM-PhM log view
The log viewer allows you to view and configure the following types of logs:
•
•
•
fault logs
E event logs
E request logs
•
•
server logs
TCA logs
•
node restart log - includes controller startup and activity switch
To view the fault log
Use this procedure to view the fault log.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
From the 1354 RM-PhM Topology View, choose Fault > Log View.
The Log View is displayed. There is a tab for each type of log. Click the applicable tab to
view the desired log type.
E....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Configuring log sizes and log archiving on the 1354 RM-PhM server
Use this procedure to configure the log sizes and log archiving attributes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
In the log view, click the Configure Log Sizes and Log Archive Settings button.
The Configure Logging and Log Archiving on the 1354 RM-PhM Server window is
displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
From the Log Type drop-down menu, choose the log type you wish to configure.
The current settings for the selected log type are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
4-12
Monitoring system events and network alarms
Using the 1354 RM-PhM log view
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Configure the attributes as desired:
•
From the Threshold Type drop-down menu, choose one of Record, or Btye.
– Record specifies that the threshold calculation is to be based on the number of
records.
–
•
•
•
Byte specifies that the threshold calculation is to be based on the size of the log
records.
In the Component Size field, specify the desired component size. The size of each log
component is measured in bytes or records, according to the Threshold Type. At any
given moment, each log (Fault, E Event, E Request, Server, and TCA) has a single
active component and a number of inactive components. Log records are added to the
active component. When the active component's size exceeds the Component Size,
the active component is made inactive and a new component is created to become the
active component.
In the Maximum um Components field, specify the maximum number of
components allowed. If a new component is created thereby exceeding the maximum
number of components, then the oldest component is purged, meaning that it is
deleted and its log records are archived according to the Log Active Settings.
The Maximum Total Size field is not editable. It displays the total size of the log
which is equal to Component Size x Maximum um Components. = Total Size
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
To configure the Log Archiving Settings, check the desired Log Archiving Mode check
box. Log Archiving Mode selections are “Log archiving disabled”, “Archive as required”,
and “Archive on schedule”.
The log archiving settings attribute fields become active. Configure the attributes as
desired:
•
Archive Directory (1354 RM-PhM Server) - the directory on 1354 RM-PhM server in
which to store archive files.
•
•
•
Scheduled Archiving Frequency - the scheduled archiving frequency.
Scheduled Archiving Start Date/Time - the date and time to start scheduled archiving.
Last Archive Date/Time - the date and time of the last log archive action.
•
Last Archive File (1354 RM-PhM Server) - The name of the last log archive file. This
file is on the 1354 RM-PhM server's file system
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
To configure the Log Archive FTP Transfer Settings, check the Enable FTP Transfer to
Remote Server check box.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
4-13
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Monitoring system events and network alarms
Using the 1354 RM-PhM log view
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The Log Archive FTP Transfer Settings attribute fields become active. Configure the
attributes as desired:
•
•
Enable FTP Transfer to Remote Server
Remote FTP Server - specify the name or the IP address of the remote FTP server
where the log files are to be archived.
•
Remote FTP Username - specify the username that is to be used to log onto the
remote server.
Remote FTP Password - specify the password that is to be used to log onto the remote
server.
Remote FTP Server Directory - specify the directory path to the log archive directory
on the remote server.
•
•
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6
To save the settings and close the window, click OK. Otherwise, click Cancel.
E....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Exporting a log file
The log file can be exported to a comma separated value (.csv) file which then can be
opened using a spread sheet, word processing, or other application. ( ote: If the log file
has more than 65536 records, then it cannot be opened completed by Microsoft Excel.
This is an Microsoft Excel limitation. In this case, use a different application to view the
whole file.)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
In the 1354 RM-PhM Log View, click the tab for the type of log that you which to export.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Click the Export to .CVS File button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Specify the location and filename for the exported file.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
Click OK.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
4-14
Monitoring system events and network alarms
Performance monitoring
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Performance monitoring
The 1354 RM-PhM gathers performance monitoring data for objects on the 1696
ROADM and 1830 PSS. For a full list of objects and more details on PMs, refer to the
1830 PSS-32 User Provisioning Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
4-15
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Monitoring system events and network alarms
Performance monitoring
Starting and stopping PM collection
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Starting and stopping PM collection
PM collection is started and stopped for an entire network element.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
In the 1354 RM-PhM topology view, choose Admin > PM Collection Admin.
The Performance Data Collection window is displayed, listing the discovered network
elements.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Select the network element in the list, right-click and choose one of:
•
•
PM Collection Start
PM Collection Stop
•
PM Collection Immediate
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
To automatically collect PMs for newly discovered Es, check the Auto-start collection
for new Es check box.
ote: It is recommended that Auto-start of PM collection should be on.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
Specify the maximum number of days for which to store PM data.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
4-16
Monitoring system events and network alarms
Performance monitoring
Viewing PM data and raw PM data
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Viewing PM data and raw PM data
PM data is collected and displayed in 15-minute and 24-hour bins.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
In the 1354 RM-PhM Inventory view, select the object for which you wish to view PM
data.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Right-click the object and choose Performance Monitoring.
The PM window for the object is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
To view the raw PM data for this object, click the View raw PM data button.
The Raw Performance Statistics window is displayed.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Configuring PM and TCA profiles
To configure TCA profiles from the 1354 RM-PhM, refer to the 1830 PSS-32 User
Provisioning Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
4-17
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Monitoring system events and network alarms
Troubleshooting Wavelength Tracker alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Troubleshooting Wavelength Tracker alarms
Wavelength Tracker monitors a service as it traverses the network by:
1. Encoding WaveKeys onto the service at the service endpoints.
2. Decoding the WaveKeys at various points along the service path to provide
wavelength identification, path tracing, and power-level monitoring. The WDM ports
on the decoder cards through which the service passes are programmed to expect to
see the WaveKeys for the service as it passes through the cards.
Table 4-1
WaveKey encoding and decoding points
Function
Where performed
WaveKey encoding
OTs and Channel Optical Filter (COF) cards at the service
endpoints.
WaveKey decoding
For 1830 PSS:
•
ALPHG – Line In, DCM To, Sig Out
•
AHPHG – Line In, DCM To, Sig Out
•
CWR8 – CLS{1-8} In, CLS{1-8} Out, OMD In, Sig In, Sig
Out, Thru Out
•
OPS – SP Input, SW Input 1, SW Input 2
For 1696R:
•
MSA - AMP I , MSA OUT, AMP OUT
•
OSC - WDM I and WDM OUT
•
BOF - WDM I and WDM OUT
•
BBAs - AMP I and AMP OUT
•
ROADM - WDM I and THRU OUT
•
WSS
•
PPS - A and B I
The following 1696R Wavelength Tracker detection points are
located on the WSS card:
•
WDM I
•
WDM OUT
•
BB I
•
THRU OUT
•
ADD/DROP I
•
ADD/DROP OUT
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
4-18
Monitoring system events and network alarms
Troubleshooting Wavelength Tracker alarms
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm generation
Wavelength Tracker alarms are generated when there are inconsistencies in WaveKey data
along the service path, or if expected WaveKeys are missing along the service path.
Wavelength Tracker alarms are useful in detecting provisioning errors and misconnected
fibers and in determining whether or not there is light on the fiber.
Common troubleshooting tasks
This section provides instructions for performing the following tasks commonly used
when troubleshooting Wavelength Tracker alarms.
•
“Determining the source of an alarm” (p. 4-19)
“Determining the WaveKeys used for a service” (p. 4-21)
•
“Querying the WaveKeys” (p. 4-22)
•
Alarm-specific troubleshooting procedures
It also provides the following alarm-specific troubleshooting procedures for alarms
generated by Wavelength Tracker:
•
•
“Troubleshooting the WaveKey insertion failed alarm” (p. 4-23)
“Troubleshooting the Missing WaveKey alarm” (p. 4-24)
“Troubleshooting the Unexpected WaveKey alarm” (p. 4-26)
•
•
“Troubleshooting the Duplicate WaveKey alarm” (p. 4-27)
“Troubleshooting the Invalid WaveKey alarm” (p. 4-29)
•
Determining the source of an alarm
You can determine the source of the alarm using the Source field of the alarm notification
listing in the alarm pane or you can click through the topology to pinpoint the alarmed
object.
Using the Source field of the alarm notification
The source of the alarm is displayed in the Source field using the following syntax:
node:object:rack:shelf:slot:port:ITU_channel
Parameter
Description
node
The network element name.
object
A descriptor for the alarmed object. For example, WDM_Channel.
rack
The rack containing the alarmed object. (Rack is always “1” in current
versions of 1696R and 1830.)
shelf
The shelf containing the alarmed object.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
4-19
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Monitoring system events and network alarms
Troubleshooting Wavelength Tracker alarms
Determining the source of an alarm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Parameter
Description
slot
The slot containing the alarmed object.
port
The port containing the alarmed object.
ITU_channel
The alarmed channel. An integer value (19 to 60 for 1696R, 17 to 60 for
PSS-32, 1 to 8 for PSS-1) that identifies the ITU channel carried over the
port. See the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS Engineering and Planning Tool User
Guide to map ITU channels to bands, channels and wavelengths.
ote: The source field contains only enough information to uniquely identify the
alarmed object. For example, the ITU channel is not included when it is not relevant.
For example, the string ode_1:WDM_Channel:1:1:3a:1:49 refers to a channel-level
alarm on ITU channel 49 on the WDM port of a BOF card inserted in rack 1, shelf 1, slot
3a.
Drilling down through the topology hierarchy
This method is most useful when only a single alarm is active on the network element.
When an alarm is triggered, the network element and all objects in the hierarchy of the
alarmed object are colored according to the severity of the alarm, as follows:
•
Red. Indicates a critical alarm.
•
•
Orange. Indicates a major alarm.
Yellow. Indicates a minor alarm.
Click down through the hierarchy to locate the alarmed object.
ote: As you traverse the hierarchy, it may take several seconds to color the alarmed
objects as each new view is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
4-20
Monitoring system events and network alarms
Troubleshooting Wavelength Tracker alarms
Determining the WaveKeys used for a service
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Determining the WaveKeys used for a service
Use the Wavelength Tracker view to determine the WaveKeys used for a service. The
WaveKey values are listed in the detailed port attributes displayed when you select the
port on the card used to encode the keys.
To determine the WaveKeys used for a service
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Choose View > Show Wavelength Services...
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Select a service and click the Details button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Select the Working Equipment tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
Expand an endpoint E and select the OT network port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
Scroll down the Attribute/Value list until you see the Wavekey 1 and Wavekey 2
attributes.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
4-21
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Monitoring system events and network alarms
Troubleshooting Wavelength Tracker alarms
Querying the WaveKeys
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Querying the WaveKeys
Use the Wavelength Tracker view to query the network WaveKey configuration. The
WaveKey query allows you enter a WaveKey pair and show the ports programmed to
receive the keys, the ports that are receiving the keys, or the ports that are encoding the
keys. Before you can query the WaveKeys, you must know the values of the WaveKeys
used for the service. See “Determining the WaveKeys used for a service” (p. 4-21).
To query WaveKeys
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Choose View > Wave Key Encoder Lookup...
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Enter the WaveKeys in the WaveKey 1 and WaveKey 2 fields.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Click on the Retrieve button.
The etwork Elements containing ports that match the WaveKey query are listed. Expand
a network element to show the ports on the network element that match the query. Expand
a port to show the channel on the port that matches the query.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
4-22
Monitoring system events and network alarms
Troubleshooting Wavelength Tracker alarms
Troubleshooting the WaveKey insertion failed alarm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Troubleshooting the WaveKey insertion failed alarm
This alarm indicates that the port is unable to generate the programmed WaveKey. This
alarm is active when there is no signal on the port, and therefore the port is not able to
generate the WaveKey. This alarm is accompanied by Missing WaveKey alarms for all
ports along the service path.
To troubleshoot a WaveKey insertion failed alarm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Determine the source of the alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Ensure that the port is connected and that the power level of the incoming signal is within
the specified power level for the port.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Expected result
The alarm and all associated Missing WaveKey alarms are cleared. If all of the associated
Missing WaveKey alarms are not cleared, continue troubleshooting as described in
“Troubleshooting the Missing WaveKey alarm” (p. 4-24).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
4-23
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Monitoring system events and network alarms
Troubleshooting Wavelength Tracker alarms
Troubleshooting the Missing WaveKey alarm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Troubleshooting the Missing WaveKey alarm
This alarm is generated on WaveKey decoder card ports. It indicates that one of the
WaveKeys the port is programmed to expect is not being received. Missing WaveKey
alarms usually appear as multiple alarms along a service path, since a missing WaveKey
at one port affects all downstream ports.
If Missing WaveKey alarms are reported at all ports along a service path, the likely cause
is a loss of signal resulting in a WaveKey insertion failure. See “Troubleshooting the
WaveKey insertion failed alarm” (p. 4-23).
If Missing WaveKey alarms are reported at several ports along the service path, the likely
cause is an unconnected or misconnected fiber along the service path. You can use the
Wavelength Tracker query or power chart to locate the bad connection. Unless there is
more than one bad connection, fixing the connection clears all of the Missing WaveKey
alarms for the service.
If a missing WaveKey alarm is reported on a single port only, the likely cause is a
configuration error, where the programmed WaveKey for the port is incorrect or not
configured. This alarm may also be due to a bad connection, if the port is the last
monitored port in the service path.
To troubleshoot missing WaveKey alarms (power chart)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Determine the source of the alarm. See “Determining the source of an alarm” (p. 4-19).
ote the ITU channel (wavelength) used for the service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Choose View > Show Wavelength Services.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Using the ITU channel retrieved in the first step, select the service from the list of
services and click on the Power (A-Z) or Power (Z-A) icons to display an end-to-end
power graph for the service. Repeat as required until you find a chart on which one or
more power levels is zero. The bad connection is at the first port in the path where the
power level measures zero.
E....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To troubleshoot a missing WaveKey alarm on (WaveKey query)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Determine the source of the alarm. See “Determining the source of an alarm” (p. 4-19).
ote the ITU channel (wavelength) used for the service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
4-24
Monitoring system events and network alarms
Troubleshooting Wavelength Tracker alarms
Troubleshooting the Missing WaveKey alarm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Determine the WaveKeys used for the service. See “Determining the WaveKeys used for
a service” (p. 4-21).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Query the WaveKeys (see “Querying the WaveKeys” (p. 4-22)) to compare the list of
ports programmed to use the keys with the list of ports on which the keys are present. The
bad connection occurs at the first port along the service path that is programmed to use
the keys but is not receiving the keys.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
4-25
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Monitoring system events and network alarms
Troubleshooting Wavelength Tracker alarms
Troubleshooting the Unexpected WaveKey alarm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Troubleshooting the Unexpected WaveKey alarm
This alarm is generated on WaveKey decoder card ports. It indicates that WaveKeys,
other than those the port was programmed to receive, are being received on the port. This
alarm may be caused by a provisioning error or by incorrect fibering.
To troubleshoot an unexpected WaveKey alarm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Determine the source of the alarm. See “Determining the source of an alarm” (p. 4-19).
ote the ITU channel (wavelength) used for the service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Determine the WaveKeys used for the service. See “Determining the WaveKeys used for
a service” (p. 4-21).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Query the WaveKeys (see “Querying the WaveKeys” (p. 4-22)) to compare the list of
ports programmed to use the keys with the list of ports on which the keys are present.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
Referring to the network plan, determine which of the Programmed Wavelength Tracker
or Present Wavelength Tracker values is correct.
If the Programmed Wavelength Tracker value is correct but the Present Wavelength
Tracker value is not, then there is a misconnected fiber. Referring to the network plan,
re-examine the fiber topology and correct the problem.
If the Present Wavelength Tracker value is correct but the Programmed Wavelength
Tracker value is not then there has been a configuration error. To correct it, synchronize
the WaveKeys across the service, as described in “Troubleshooting the Missing WaveKey
alarm” (p. 4-24).
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
4-26
Monitoring system events and network alarms
Troubleshooting Wavelength Tracker alarms
Troubleshooting the Duplicate WaveKey alarm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Troubleshooting the Duplicate WaveKey alarm
This alarm indicates that two or more OT or COF ports are encoding the same set of
WaveKeys. It is likely caused by a provisioning error in the CLI, web interface, or TL1
interface. To fix this alarm, you need to reset the WaveKeys to new values for one of the
services using the duplicate WaveKey pair.
Resetting the WaveKeys is a two step process. You first change the WaveKeys encoded
by the OT/COF card at the service endpoint, and then change the decoder card WDM
ports through which the service passes to expect the new WaveKeys.
To troubleshoot a duplicate key
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Determine the source of the alarm. See “Determining the source of an alarm” (p. 4-19).
ote the ITU channel (wavelength) used for the service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Determine the WaveKeys used for the service. See “Determining the WaveKeys used for
a service” (p. 4-21).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Query the WaveKeys (see “Querying the WaveKeys” (p. 4-22)) to determine the COF
card ports that are encoding the WaveKeys.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
Refer to the network plan and determine the OT/COF card for which you want to change
the Wave Key encoding. Select the OT/COF card you want to change. Right-click on the
card and choose Allocate WaveKey.
The Wavelength Tracker keys encoded by the OT/COF card are set to new values. Take a
note of the new values.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
Choose View > Wave Key Encoder Lookup...
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6
Enter the WaveKeys determined in Step 4 in the Service Wave Key Query form and click
Retrieve.
The service that uses the OT/COF card with the new WaveKeys is listed in the
Wavelength Tracker results pane.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7
Select the service and click on the Provision new wavelength tracker keys icon.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
4-27
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Monitoring system events and network alarms
Troubleshooting Wavelength Tracker alarms
Troubleshooting the Duplicate WaveKey alarm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: The WaveKey decoder cards in the service path are updated to expect the new
wavekeys.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
4-28
Monitoring system events and network alarms
Troubleshooting Wavelength Tracker alarms
Troubleshooting the Invalid WaveKey alarm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Troubleshooting the Invalid WaveKey alarm
Generated on WaveKey decoder card ports. Since the system does not allow you to
program WaveKeys that are out of range for a specific band and channel, this alarm is not
normally generated. It is seen only if expected WaveKeys are programmed for a port and
then the programmed band for the port is changed, making the previously programmed
WaveKeys invalid.
To troubleshoot an Invalid WaveKey alarm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Determine the source of the alarm. See “Determining the source of an alarm” (p. 4-19).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
From the Topology View, right-click on the network element containing the card and
select Provision > Facility / Connection.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Locate the card and port for the alarm and expand to list the channels on the port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
Select the alarmed channel and change the expected WaveKeys to the correct values for
the service.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
4-29
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Monitoring system events and network alarms
Troubleshooting a power out of range alarm
Overview
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Troubleshooting a power out of range alarm
Use this procedure to determine the reason for a power out of range alarm. Typically, a
power out of range alarm occurs during provisioning and installation and is cleared in the
course of configuring the network to match the network plan.
In an in-service network, a power out of range alarm occurs as a result of a kinked or
dirty fiber. The 1354 RM-PhM helps isolate the fault and focus the maintenance effort.
Impact
Depending on the root cause and severity of the power out of range alarm, traffic can be
interrupted until the fault is resolved.
To troubleshoot a power out of range alarm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Right-click on the alarm and select Inventory view.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
The inventory view for the network element is opened with the alarmed port selected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Expand to show the WDM channels on the port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
Select the alarmed channel. The attributes for the channel are displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
Refer to the network plan and confirm that the values specified in the Expected Power
and Power Deviation fields are correct:
•
If the values correspond to the network plan, note the WaveKeys used for the service
and proceed to Step 6.
•
If the values do not correspond to the network plan, correct them and then click
Apply:
– If the alarm clears, you are done.
– If the alarm does not clear, note the WaveKeys used for the service and proceed to
Step 6.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
4-30
Monitoring system events and network alarms
Troubleshooting a power out of range alarm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6
Monitor the power across the service to isolate the location and nature of the fault, and
adjust the power levels as required to remedy the fault condition.
1. Choose View > Show Wavelength Services
2. Enter the WaveKeys determined in Step 5 in the Service WaveKey Query form and
click Retrieve.
A list of services that use the specified WaveKey pair is displayed.
3. Select the service and click on the Power (A-Z) or Power (Z-A) icons to show the
channel power for the service across the network in either the A to Z direction or Z to
A direction.
4. If the provisioned power levels meet the specifications contained in network plan, the
problem is likely due to a dirty or kinked fiber. Use the power trace information for
the service to localize the fault and repair as required.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
4-31
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
5
Managing services
5
Overview
Purpose
This chapter explains how to manage services.
Contents
Setting service preferences
5-2
5-2
Listing and editing services
5-3
5-3
Creating or editing a wavelength service
5-5
5-5
Importing and exporting service definitions
5-13
5-13
Discovering services in the network
5-15
5-15
Unmanaging services in the network
5-16
5-16
Partial services
5-17
5-17
Sub-rate service
5-18
5-18
Sub-rate service creation via service wizard
5-21
1696R and 1830 PSS interoperability
5-24
5-24
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
5-1
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Managing services
Setting service preferences
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Setting service preferences
Use this procedure to specify the preferences you wish to use when creating or deleting
services.
To set service preferences
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
In the 1354 RM-PhM Topology View, choose Admin>Settings.
The Settings window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Click the Service Attribute Provisioning tab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Set the Provisioning Options:
•
•
•
•
•
Set service “admin up”- automatically sets the state of the service to admin up when
the service is created.
Set service AI S - automatically sets the state of the service to in-service when the
service is created.
Auto Keying ( E) - if selected, the Wave keys are set automatically by the E.
Auto Keying ( MS) - if selected, the Wave keys are set automatically by the 1354
RM-PhM.
Do not show on create - To prevent the service provisioning options from being
displayed when a service is created, click this option. In this case, the service
provisioning options specified here are used.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
Click OK.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
5-2
Managing services
Listing and editing services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Listing and editing services
Services that have already been configured can be viewed or edited.
ote: 1354 RM-PhM may not route PSS-1 services using the shortest route. The
reason has to do with the fact that there are 2 line ports. If both are assigned, then
1354 RM-PhM always starts with L1 and will use a route if one is found that way. It
will only use L2 if a route with proper resources was not found on L1 (or user
responded to stop searching when prompted), or L1 is explicitly excluded or
unassigned.
To list and edit services from the 1354 RM-PhM
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
You can view all of the services within the network, or you can view the services which
traverse a particular network element.
1. To view all services in the network, ensure that no network elements are selected in
the 1354 RM-PhM Topology View, and click the Wavelength Services icon.
The Wavelength Services window is displayed, listing all services in the network.
2. To view all services that traverse a particular network element or set of network
elements, select the network element(s) in the 1354 RM-PhM Topology View, and
click the Wavelength Services icon.
The Wavelength Services window is displayed, listing all services on the selected
network elements.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Select the service you wish to edit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Click Details.
The editing window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
View or edit the attributes of the service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
To save changes, click Save. To exit without saving changes, click Cancel.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
5-3
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Managing services
Listing and editing services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
To view wavelength usage in the network
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
In the 1354 RM-PhM Topology View, choose Provision>Wavelength Usage Matrix.
The Wavelength Usage Matrix window is displayed, displaying the wavelengths used in
the network, and the network elements that they traverse.
The Wavelength Usage Matrix window provides the following actions:
•
•
•
•
refresh the wavelength usage data - Click the Refresh button.
change the row order so that the ring is displayed in the reverse direction. The first
row remains the same. Click the Ring button.
list wavelength services for the selected network elements. Select one or more Es,
and click the List Wavelength Services button. The Wavelength Services window is
displayed.
save wavelength usage matrix data as a HTML web page. Click the Save Wavelength
Usage Data button. You are prompted to specify a filename and location to save the
file.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
5-4
Managing services
Creating or editing a wavelength service
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Creating or editing a wavelength service
Wavelength services are implemented in two basic scenarios:
•
•
pre-wired - all of the cards are installed, the cables connected, and
transponders/transmitters are operating, and then the service is configured.
pre-provisioned - the network element is pre-provisioned using the CLI or web
interface, the service is configured, and then the cards are inserted, the cables
connected, and the transponders/transmitters are turned on
Service protection options
Wavelength services can be transported across the network unprotected, or protected by
one of several methods. For protection options, see the 1830 PSS-32 User Provisioning
Guide.
Wavelength services can also have protected segments in them. The number of segments
within each service and the equipment across which each segment runs varies with each
particular service.
The 1354 RM-PhM uses the following protection definitions:
Unprotected
The service will fail if any resource in its route fails.
Partially protected
Service protection exists but has at least one shared E or shared topological connection.
Fully protected
The service will not fail if any single managed resource along its route fails (excluding
the originating and terminating network elements for the service).
To create a wavelength service
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
ote: The recommended method for creating a wavelength service for a pre-wired
scenario is as follows:
1. Determine your network and link requirements.
2. Install the hardware and fibers and turn on and adjust the
transponders/transmitters.
3. Using the 1354 RM-PhM provision the wavelength service according to the
network plan.
4. Verify that the hardware and transponders are operating according to the network
plan.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
5-5
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Managing services
Creating or editing a wavelength service
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Perform the physical setup according to your company field installation safety
procedures. Following the shelf and fiber layout, insert the cards, connect the cables and
turn on the transponders.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
In the 1354 RM-PhM Topology View, select the network elements on which the service
endpoints reside.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Click the Provision a Wavelength Service icon.
The Provision ew Wavelength Service window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
In the Service ame field, type a name for the service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
In the Customer ID field, type a customer name for the service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6
In the Layer Rate field, use the drop-down menu to choose a layer rate.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7
In the Protection field, use the drop-down menu to choose a protection type, Unprotected,
ES CP Protected, or Fully Protected.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8
If the service is fully protected, in the Client Protection Options field, specify one of the
protection options, Unprotected, Unprotected (Splitter), or Dual Client.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9
Specify the directionality of the service:
•
If this is a bidirectional service, check the Bidirectional check box.
ote: When provisioning a bidirectional service, you must ensure that all ports
through which the service passes are configured as bidirectional ports. The 1354
RM-PhM does not allow you to create two unidirectional services on the same client
ports.
ote: The only exception to this rule is the case of SFC single fiber mode services
where the PhM does actually allow two unidirectional services on the same client
port.
•
If this is a unidirectional service, you must set the directionality of the client ports at
the ends of the service to unidirectional in order to suppress alarms on the unused
Rx/Tx ports.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
5-6
Managing services
Creating or editing a wavelength service
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10
Specify the keying mode:
•
•
•
•
•
Auto Keying ( E) - causes both Es to allocate the Wavelength Tracker keys
(wavekeys) for the service. This option should be used on networks where E-to- E
links use Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC) cards. This option must be used to
prevent wavekey duplication if a third-party management system is also used to
provision services and assign wavekeys.
Auto Keying (EMS) - causes the 1354 RM-PhM to allocate the Wavelength Tracker
keys for the service. This should be used on networks with no OSC cards deployed.
1354 RM-PhM auto-keying should be avoided on networks where a third-party
management system is provisioning services and assigning wavekeys.
o Keying - Provisions cross-connects without provisioning WaveKeys on those
cross-connects.
Force XC Creation - bypassing check to ensure that lines are commissioning before
creating a service on them (only used during commissioning of the network).
Enable Full etwork Search - when enabled, forces the service routing to consider all
Es in all topology groups under “Main View”, and not just the groups containing the
endpoint Es.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11
Click ext.
The system searches the selected network elements for valid connection termination
points for the service, and then the Select Termination Points window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12
For each of the A and Z End CTPs, use the drop-down menu to select the desired end
point. The A1 and Z1 end points specify the working path endpoints. The A2 and Z2
endpoints specify the protection path end points.
To refine the list of endpoints, click the Filter check box. A list of filter criteria is
displayed. Specify the criteria on which to search and click the Search button. The list of
endpoints is refined to reflect only those which match the search criteria.
Alternatively, click the Auto-Pick Endpoints button, which automatically determines
eligible endpoint pairs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13
Once the endpoints have been specified, click ext.
The system checks for an available route (or in the case of a protected service, multiple
routes), and then displays it as a series of fiber endpoints as shown in the following
figure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
5-7
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Managing services
Creating or editing a wavelength service
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 5-1 Wavelength service fiber endpoints
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14
Click Finish and one of two Power Management windows is displayed.
If the service require manual power management, then the following window is
displayed:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
5-8
Managing services
Creating or editing a wavelength service
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 5-2 Manually power-managed service
If the service does not require manual power management, then the following window is
displayed:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
5-9
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Managing services
Creating or editing a wavelength service
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 5-3 Automatically power-managed service
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15
If the service requires manual power management, use the Power (A-Z) and Power (Z-A)
buttons to launch the power management windows through which you can adjust the
service's power levels to enable the service.
If the service does not require manual power management, the Power (A-Z) and Power
(Z-A) can be used to view the power levels along the service, but no action is necessary.
Once you are finished adjusting or view the power levels along the service, Click Close.
The Provision Service attributes window is displayed (only if it was specified to be
displayed, in the Service Attribute Provisioning window).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
5-10
Managing services
Creating or editing a wavelength service
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16
In the Provision Service attributes window, enable or disable the following attributes as
desired:
•
Set service “admin up”
•
Set service AI S - sets the service to automatic in-service
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17
Click OK.
The cross-connections are provisioned to the network, and the service information is
committed to the database.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To delete a wavelength service
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Locate the service(s) that you want to delete:
•
use the Wavelength Services view
•
click the Wavelength Services button in the 1354 RM-PhM Topology view. To list
services for a particular network element or set of network elements, select the
network element(s) and then click the Wavelength Services button. To list all services
known to the 1354 RM-PhM, select “Topology View” in the navigation tree, then
click the Wavelength Services button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Select the service(s) to delete, and click the Delete button.
The Deprovision Service attributes window is displayed (only if it was specified to be
displayed, in the Service WaveKey Provisioning window).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Configure the deprovision service attributes as desired.
•
Disable Client Port - sets the state of the client port to “down”
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
Click OK.
The service(s) deletion begins.
ote: The service being displayed is the one being deleted, and once deletion
commences for it, it is not possible to stop it. However, pressing the Cancel button
stops deletion of any subsequent services. For example, if you are deleting five
services and click Cancel when the third service is being deleted, then the results are
that the first three services are deleted and the last two services are not deleted.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
5-11
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Managing services
Creating or editing a wavelength service
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ote: During service deletion, the 1354 RM-PhM sets the transponder ports to
maintenance state for a period of time. Doing this causes the Es to raise the
condition “Manually caused abnormal condition - port in maintenance” for each of the
transponder ports. This condition clears once the service deletion completes.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
5-12
Managing services
Importing and exporting service definitions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Importing and exporting service definitions
The 1354 RM-PhM provides the capability to export and import service definitions. This
is useful during software and database upgrades, as well as network reconfiguration, so
that you do not need to recreate your services. Service definitions are saved as XML files.
To export a service definition
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
From the Wavelength Services window, select a service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Click the Export Service icon.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
A Windows browser is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
Specify a name for the service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
Specify a directory in which to save the service.
ote: Specify a directory outside of the 1354 RM-PhM directory so that the service
definitions are not overwritten when the 1354 RM-PhM software is upgraded.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6
Click Accept.
The service definition is saved as an XML file in the directory specified.
E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
To import a service definition
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
From the Wavelength Services window, click the Import Service icon.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
A Windows browser is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
avigate to the directory which contains the service definition file that you want to
import.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
5-13
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Managing services
Importing and exporting service definitions
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
Select the desired service definition file.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
Click Accept.
The 1354 RM-PhM imports the service definition and creates the service.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
5-14
Managing services
Discovering services in the network
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Discovering services in the network
The 1354 RM-PhM can discover services that have been created using other user
interfaces such as the CLI and the web interface. Once discovered, these services can be
managed by the 1354 RM-PhM.
To discover services in the network
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
In the 1354 RM-PhM topology view, select the group for which you wish to discover
services, right-click and choose Discover Services in Group.
The Service Upload window is displayed, showing the progress and status of service
discovery.
ote: The Service Upload window does not provide feedback on services that were
not successfully discovered.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
To see more information on service discovery, click the Details button.
The Service upload window is expanded to include a section for service discovery details.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
When you are finished, click Close.
The discovered services can now be managed using the 1354 RM-PhM Wavelength
Services and Wavelength Tracker capabilities. Only services that were successfully
discovered can be viewed and managed in the 1354 RM-PhM. Services that could not be
successfully discovered are not displayed.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
5-15
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Managing services
Unmanaging services in the network
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Unmanaging services in the network
The 1354 RM-PhM can stop managing a service, but leave the service active in the
network.
To unmanage a service
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Locate the service(s) that you want to stop managing:
•
use the Wavelength Services view
•
click the Wavelength Services button in the 1354 RM-PhM Topology view. To list
services for a particular network element or set of network elements, select the
network element(s) and then click the Wavelength Services button. To list all services
known to the 1354 RM-PhM, select “Topology View” in the navigation tree, then
click the Wavelength Services button.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Select the service(s) to stop managing, right-click and choose Unmanage Wavelength
Services.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
You are prompted to confirm the action. Click Yes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
The service is removed from the 1354 RM-PhM, but the cross-connects remain active and
the port states are left unchanged.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
5-16
Managing services
Partial services
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Partial services
A partial service is created by a topology change in the network that causes one (or more)
of the cross connects associated with a service to be deleted.
To repair a partial service
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Click on the List Wavelength Services button.
The Wavelength Services window is displayed, listing all services in the network.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Locate and select the partial service that you want to repair, and then click the Repair
Partial Service button.
The 1354 RM-PhM attempts to recreate missing cross connects, or to learn them back if
they have been manually added at the E, and reconstruct the service.
If the recreation attempt is successful, the status of the service is updated to Active.
If the recreation attempt fails, there is nothing more that can be done from the 1354
RM-PhM. The service must be repaired using one of the other interfaces.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
5-17
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Managing services
Sub-rate service
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Sub-rate service
ote: Sub-rate service is supported by 1830 PSS-1 GBE beginning in 1354 RM-PhM
Release 7.0,
Configuring the operational mode of 1830 PSS-1 GBE card
The two operational modes supported by the 1830 PSS-1 GBE card are:
•
•
Fullrate Mode - Under this mode, each 1830 PSS-1 GBE client port can support only
one service with a total of 10 services (maximum) flowing through each Line port.
This is the default mode.
Subrate Mode - Under this mode, each 1830 PSS-1 GBE client port can support a
maximum of 10 services with a total of 32 services (maximum) flowing through each
Line port.
Configuring the card to subrate mode is a prerequisite for creation of a SubGigE service.
Modifying the card mode results in the following changes:
•
•
If the card mode is changed to subrate mode, then the layer rate of the client port in
1354 RM-PhM is changed to SubGigE, though the port type is still GigE.
1354 RM-PhM displays a message when attempting to change the operational mode if
there is already a service running through the card. The user is prevented from
changing the operational mode of the 1830 PSS-1 GBE card if 1354 RM-PhM has
any services using the card. Services using the card must be unmanaged or deleted
before changing the operational mode.
VTS map
The VTS map feature displays VTS map information for 1830 PSS-1 GBE client ports
via table format. The first column displays the Client VTS attribute names. Columns 2 – 5
display the bandwidth profile attributes associated with each VTS. The last column
displays the CE-VLA ID for each client VTS.
ote: Tooltips are available for each field which displays the value for that column.
The bandwidth profile attributes (table columns 2 – 5) consist of four traffic parameters as
shown below:
•
•
CIR (Committed Information Rate) - CIR is the average rate up to which service
frames are delivered per the service performance objectives.
CBS (Committed Burst Size) - CBS is the maximum number of bytes allowed for
incoming service frames to still be CIR-conformant.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
5-18
Managing services
Sub-rate service
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
•
•
EIR (Excess Information Rate) - EIR is the average rate up to which service frames
are delivered without any performance objectives.
EBS (Excess Burst Size) - . EBS is the maximum number of bytes allowed for
incoming service frames to still be EIR-conformant
ote: Bandwidth profile attributes are provisioned on creation of a sub-rate gige
service and they are associated with the cross-connect provisioned on the E. These
attributes are read only in the VTS Map table and cannot be modified.
The user can configure the CE-VLA ID attribute (table column 6). This determines how
the packets are mapped into the client VTS. The valid CE-VLA ID parameters for each
client VTS are:
•
•
Separate numbers in the range of 1-4095, separated by comma.
The contiguous range of VLA IDs (valid value is 1-4095), separated by comma.
•
•
The mixed number and the VLA ID range, separated by comma.
ALL (case sensitive): all the tagged (CE-VLA ID=[1-4095], priority tagged
(CE-VLA ID=0) and untagged packets are mapped into the line VTS
blank string: A blank string (i.e. zero-length) string is used to indicate that no traffic
flow is mapped into the client VTS. The default CE-VLA ID value for each client
VTS is a blank string.
•
ote: CE-VLA ID can be reused on different client ports but must be unique on a
given client port.
To configure/view VTS map details
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
From the Inventory View, right click on the desired 1830 PSS-1 GBE client port and
select Configure/View VTS Map . Following are the prerequisites for this menu item to
be enabled.
•
•
The 1830 PSS-1 GBE card must be provisioned in subrate mode.
The client port must be assigned in order to configure or view VTS Map details.
Result: The Configure/View VTS Map window is displayed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Enter valid CE-VLA ID parameters for each client VTS and click Apply .
ote: 1354 RM-PhM displays a pop up error message if valid constraints are violated.
CE-VLA ID is not editable if there is a valid cross-connection on the target client
VTS.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
5-19
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Managing services
Sub-rate service
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: Packets are mapped into the client VTS according to the CE-VLA ID in the
mapping table.
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
5-20
Managing services
Sub-rate service
Sub-rate service creation via service wizard
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Sub-rate service creation via service wizard
A sub-rate service can be created between two 1830 PSS-1 GBE Es provisioned in
sub-rate mode. It requires all pass through nodes to be provisioned in sub-rate mode also.
The following conditions apply to sub-rate service:
•
Protected services are not supported with SubGigE layer rate. A message is displayed
at the bottom of the wizard panel if the user selects any protection level other than
“U PROTECTED”.
•
All sub-rate services are Bidirectional.
To create sub-rate service via service wizard
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
In the 1354 RM-PhM Topology View, select the two 1830 PSS-1 GBE Es for which the
sub-rate service will be created.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2
Click the Provision a Wavelength Service icon
Result: The Provision
ew Wavelength Service window is displayed. The service
creation wizard lists the common layer rate supported by the two selected Es.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3
Select SubGigE layer rate for creation of a sub-rate service. Click ext.
ote: Intermediate Es being in sub-rate mode is not validated until the routing
portion of the wizard.
Result: The Service End Point and Connection Options selection window is
displayed. The A end and Z end client endpoints displays 10 CTPs for each client
port. If the client port is already assigned then it displays 10 SubGigE CTPs or else it
displays 10 unassigned client CTPs.
ote: 1830 PSS-1 GBE client ports can be preassigned and provisioned with client
VLA IDs prior to running the service creation wizard.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4
Provision the connection options against each VTS connection according to the following
criteria:
•
•
•
•
Committed Information Rate: Ranges from 0 – 1000 Mbps at 100 Mbps granularity.
Default is 100 Mbps.
Committed Burst Size: Ranges from 16 – 16384 Kbytes. Default is 256 Kbyte
Excess Information Rate: Ranges from 0 – 1000 Mbps at 100 Mbps granularity.
Default is 1000 Mbps.
Excess Burst Size: Ranges from 16 – 16384 Kbytes. Default is 4096 Kbyte.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
5-21
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Managing services
Sub-rate service
Sub-rate service creation via service wizard
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Following are the restrictions imposed on the above values:
•
•
•
CIR should always be less than or equal to EIR.
CBS should always be less than or equal to EBS.
EIR cannot be zero and should always be greater than or equal to CI
•
EBS should always be greater than or equal to CBS.
Available Bandwidth on A end and Z End field denotes the unallocated bandwidth on
each client port. This is a read-only field which is calculated by the E after creation of a
sub-rate service.
If the client port is unassigned, then the service creation requires the CE-VLA ID to be
provisioned on the client port before creating the cross-connects on the E. The
CE-VLA ID field is automatically filled if the selected client endpoint is already
provisioned with a valid CE-VLA ID using the “Configure/View VTS Map” menu item
in the Inventory view.
The CE-VLA ID displayed in the textbox in the service creation wizard is the
CE-VLA ID of the client endpoint on the E that was selected last in the topology view
before launching the service creation wizard (i.e. the Z end E). If the CE-VLA ID
provisioned on the A End Client port mismatches with the CE-VLA ID provisioned on Z
End Client port, then an error message is displayed at the bottom of the screen with the
client endpoint and its CE-VLA ID details and the ext button is disabled. The user
must correct or delete the client port provisioning via the Inventory View and then restart
the wavelength service creation wizard to proceed with the creation of the service.
Result: The
ext button in the Service Creation wizard is enabled if all the
requirements are satisfied. Otherwise, the ext button is disabled with an error
message displayed at the bottom of the screen.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5
Click ext.
Result: The Service Route Selection window is displayed showing Channel at Link
Start and Channel at Link End information.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6
Click Finish.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
5-22
Managing services
Sub-rate service
Sub-rate service creation via service wizard
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Result: 1354 RM-PhM provisions any required cross-connects into the network.
Unlike full-rate GigE cross-connects, the sub-rate cross-connects (with SubGigE as
the layer rate) are provisioned on the E along with the och cross-connects. It also
provisions service attributes based on System Settings. The default service state can
be defined in the “Service Attribute Provisioning” tab of the “Preferences” panel
available under the “Admin” menu item from the main topology view. If desired the
service attribute dialog can be hidden or shown on each service creation (“Do not
show on create” option).
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
5-23
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Managing services
1696R and 1830 PSS interoperability
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1696R and 1830 PSS interoperability
Creating service for 1696R and 1830 interoperation
The following provisioning steps must be taken on an 1830 OT prior to creating a service
that will interoperate with a 1696R OT. All the provisioning described below is done
using the PhM Inventory View.
PSS-32 11STGE12 / 1696R 10xGE
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Ensure that the following is provisioned on the 1STGE12 line port:
•
OTU2 Rate = 11.096
•
•
OUT2 FEC Mode = EFEC2
ODU2 Payload Type = 131
E....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PSS-32 11STAR1 / 1696R OC192sws
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Assign 11STAR1 client port as OC192.
Ensure that the following is provisioned on the 11STAR1 line port:
•
•
OTU2 Rate = 10.707
OUT2 FEC Mode = EFEC
•
ODU2 Payload Type = 253
E....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
PSS-32 11STAR1 / 1696R 10GigELAN
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1
Assign 11STAR1 client port as 10GigE.
Set 10GigE client port attribute "Encapsulation Mode" to "CBRLA 11.049".
Ensure that the following is provisioned on the 11STAR1 line port:
•
•
•
OTU2 Rate = 10.707
OUT2 FEC Mode = EFEC
ODU2 Payload Type = 128
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
5-24
Managing services
1696R and 1830 PSS interoperability
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
END
O F
S T E P S
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
5-25
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A
access identifier (AID)
A unique identifier used to address equipment slots and ports, as well as facility tributaries, that
are defined for the system architecture.
add/drop multiplexer/multiplexing (ADM)
A high-speed multiplexing function offered by SO ET that allows lower-level signals to be added
to or dropped from an optical carrier channel. The connection to the add/drop multiplexer is
through a tributary channel at a lower SO ET carrier rate or a specific digital speed (for example,
DS3 or DS1).
ADM
See “add/drop multiplexer/multiplexing” (p. GL-1) for definition.
AHPHG
High Power High Gain DWDM Amplifier. See “ALPHG” (p. GL-2) for related term.
AID
See “access identifier ” (p. GL-1) for definition.
AIM
See “alarm indication message” (p. GL-1) for definition.
AINS
Automatic in-service.
AIS
See “alarm indication signal” (p. GL-1) for definition.
alarm
External notification or display of a failure condition. The indication of failure is towards an
external system interface or via audible or visible indicators.
alarm indication message (AIM)
A return message sent from one network element ( E) to another E that indicates it has received
a signal that is so degraded that it is raising an alarm.
alarm indication signal (AIS)
A signal sent downstream by an E to indicate that its incoming signal has failed.
alarm list
A status report that lists active alarms on the E.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
GL-1
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
alarm log
A history of setting and clearing system alarms on the E.
alarm severity
An attribute that defines the priority of the alarm message. The method in which alarms are
processed depends on their severity.
ALPHG
Low Power High Gain DWDM Amplifier. See “AHPHG ” (p. GL-1) for related term.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
A United States standards body that accredits standards for programming languages,
communications, and networking. A SI is the U.S. representative in the International
Organization for Standards (ISO).
amplified spontaneous emission (ASE)
Optical noise generated in an erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA) with and without signal input
power.
ANSI
See “American ational Standards Institute” (p. GL-2) for definition.
APD
See “avalanche photodiode” (p. GL-3) for definition.
APR
See “automatic power reduction” (p. GL-3) for definition.
APS
See “automatic protection switching” (p. GL-3) for definition.
APSD
See “automatic power shutdown” (p. GL-3) for definition.
ASE
See “amplified spontaneous emission” (p. GL-2) for definition.
asynchronous
Data that is transmitted without an associated clock signal.
asynchronous transfer mode (ATM)
A fast-packet, connection-oriented, cell-switching technology for broadband signals. ATM is
designed to accommodate any form of data, including voice, facsimile, computer data, video,
image, and multimedia, whether compressed or uncompressed, whether real-time or non-real-time
in nature, and with guaranteed quality of service (QoS).
ATM networks will accept or reject connections based on a user's average and peak bandwidth
requirements, providing flexible and efficient service for LA -to-LA , compressed video, and
other applications that involve variable bit rate (VBR) traffic.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
GL-2
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ATM
See “asynchronous transfer mode” (p. GL-2) for definition.
attenuation
The decrease in signal strength along a fiber optic waveguide caused by absorption and scattering.
Attenuation is usually expressed as dB/km.
attenuator
A passive device that reduces the amplitude of a signal without distorting the waveform.
automatic power reduction (APR)
The lowering of the laser power to a limit that fits into the class 1 category for handling fiber
cables. APR replaces the full power-off feature known as ALS (automatic laser shutdown) or
APSD (automatic power shutdown).
automatic power shutdown (APSD)
A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of optical amplifiers to
avoid exposure to hazardous levels.
automatic protection switching (APS)
A network survivability method in which traffic is automatically switched to a protection route
when a failure is detected on a working route.
autonomous message
Message sent by the system to the CIT to notify it of any state change in the system. Autonomous
messages are not responses to a CIT-initiated command. Examples of these messages include
alarms, events (non-alarmed condition), notification of connections that are added or deleted, and
changes in the system database.
avalanche photodiode (APD)
A photodetector that can be regarded as the semiconductor analog to photomultipliers. By
applying a high reverse bias voltage (typically 100-200 V in silicon), an APD shows an internal
current gain effect (around 100) due to impact ionization (avalanche effect).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B
back reflection
See “Fresnel reflection” (p. GL-11).
background block errors (BBE)
Errors identified through OT performance monitoring.
backward defect indication (BDI)
The OT port has detected a Backward Defect Indication at the ODUk Path layer. This defect
indicates that the peer OTUk port has detected condition that is treated as Server Signal Failure.
band optical filter (BOF)
A band-dependent optical card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
GL-3
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
bay
An aluminum steel enclosure for rack-mounted equipment. Also know as a rack.
BB
See “broadband” (p. GL-4) for definition.
BBA
See “broadband amplifier” (p. GL-4) for definition.
BBE
See “background block errors” (p. GL-3) for definition.
BDI
See “backward defect indication” (p. GL-3) for definition.
BER
See “bit error rate” (p. GL-4) for definition.
bidirectional line switched ring (BLSR)
A survivable SO ET transport architecture that protects against cable cuts and node failures by
providing duplicate, geographically diverse paths for each service. etwork elements are
interconnected in a closed fiber loop (four fibers for a four-fiber BLSR architecture or two fibers
for a two-fiber BLSR). A service can reach its destination by traveling in either direction around
the ring. Exactly one-half of the bandwidth available between adjacent nodes in each direction is
used for working traffic, with the remaining bandwidth available for protection.
bit error rate (BER)
BER measures how accurately a bitstream is transmitted through a system. It measures how many
bits are received in error, compared to how many bits are sent.
BLSR
See “bidirectional line switched ring” (p. GL-4) for definition.
BOF
See “band optical filter” (p. GL-3) for definition.
broadband (BB)
A technology that refers to the always-open gateway to Internet-connected services delivered at
lightning-fast speeds.
broadband amplifier (BBA)
Optical amplifier that supports broadband technology.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
C
CAD
See “channel add/drop card” (p. GL-5) for definition.
central office (CO)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
GL-4
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A CO can be a building, a switch, or collection of switches where subscriber lines are joined to
switching equipment that connects the subscribers to each other, other subscribers, and/or long
distance subscribers.
CFR
Code of Federal Regulations.
channel
A communications path or the signal sent over that path.
channel add/drop card (CAD)
Used with automatic power management; allows setpoints for a manual transmission line.
channel optical filter (COF)
COF cards facilitate the WaveKey encoding function, employed at service endpoints.
chromatic dispersion
The effect describing the velocity dependence of light travelling through a medium, depending on
its wavelength. For optical telecommunication signals, this effect causes the light pulses to spread
out and the resulting distortion in pulse shape degrades the signal quality.
CIT
See “craft interface terminal” (p. GL-6) for definition.
cladding
Material that surrounds the core of an optical fiber that has a lower index of refraction compared
to that of the core. The lower index of refraction causes the transmitted light to travel down the
core.
CLEI
See “common language element identifier” (p. GL-5) for definition.
CN
See “control network” (p. GL-6) for definition.
CO
See “central office” (p. GL-4) for definition.
coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM)
CWDM is the method of combining multiple signals on laser beams at various wavelengths for
transmission along fiber optic cables. The number of channels is fewer than in dense wavelength
division multiplexing (DWDM), but more than in standard wavelength division multiplexing
(WDM).
COF
See “channel optical filter” (p. GL-5) for definition.
common language element identifier (CLEI)
CLEI codes enable you to clearly and consistently identify and track virtually every type of
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
GL-5
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
telecommunications equipment. In the United States, these codes are assigned by Telecordia, and
are 10 bytes long.
connector
A mechanical or optical device that provides a demountable connection between two fibers or a
fiber and a source or detector.
connector variation
The maximum value in dB of the difference in insertion loss between mating optical connectors
(for example, with re-mating and temperature cycling). Also called optical connector variation.
control network (CN)
The portion of the network that carries control and management traffic (for example,
communications between the Es and between the Es and the EMS). The control network does
not carry user traffic. The control communications use the S MP protocol.
core
The central portion of the fiber that transmits light. It is composed of material with a higher index
of refraction than the cladding.
coupler
An optical device that combines or splits power from optical fibers.
coupling ratio/loss (CR)
The ratio/loss of optical power from one output port to the total output power, expressed as a
percentage.
CPE
See “customer premises equipment” (p. GL-6) for definition.
CR
See “coupling ratio/loss” (p. GL-6) for definition.
craft interface terminal (CIT)
A local interface between humans and a E. It is used to issue commands to the local system or,
by way of a remote login, to another system on the same fiber as the local system.
customer premises equipment (CPE)
Terminal and associated equipment and inside wiring located at a subscriber's premises. The
equipment is connected with the carrier's communication network at the demarcation point.
CWDM
See “coarse wavelength division multiplexing” (p. GL-5) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
D
data communication network (DCN)
DC supports communications between network elements ( Es) and the network management
system ( MS).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
GL-6
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DCM
See “dispersion compensation module” (p. GL-7) for definition.
DCN
See “data communication network” (p. GL-6) for definition.
dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM)
A multiplexing technique that uses close spectral spacing of individual optical carrier wavelengths
to reduce the total number of fibers needed to provide a given amount of information-carrying
capacity. The technique takes advantage of desirable transmission characteristics (for example,
minimum dispersion or attenuation) within a given fiber.
DGEF
See “dynamic gain equalization filter” (p. GL-7) for definition.
DHCP
See “dynamic host configuration protocol” (p. GL-7) for definition.
dispersion
The temporal spreading of a light signal in an optical waveguide caused by light signals traveling
at different speeds through a fiber either due to modal or chromatic effects.
dispersion compensation module (DCM)
Spooled fiber used to control excess dispersion found in certain fiber types at pre- and
post-amplification.
distortion
The difference in value between two measurements of a signal (transmitted and received).
DS3
Standard for digital transmission (American ational Standard for telecommunications Carrier-to-Customer Installation - DS3 Metallic Interface, A SI T1.404- 1989).
DWDM
See “dense wavelength division multiplexing” (p. GL-7) for definition.
dynamic gain equalization filter (DGEF)
A filter that equalizes the gain of an optical signal.
dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP)
DHCP allows a DHCP server to automatically assign an IP address to a computer's TCP/IP stack
software. The number is taken from a defined range of numbers for a given network.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E
earth
The European term for electrical ground.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
GL-7
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EC
See “equipment controller” (p. GL-9) for definition.
EDFA
See “erbium-doped fiber amplifier” (p. GL-9) for definition.
edge node
A node that connects to external network or customer equipment, as opposed to providing an
interconnection point between other nodes. It is located at the "edge" of the network.
egress
Traffic leaving a network
EIA
See “Electronic Industries Alliance” (p. GL-8) for definition.
electrical variable optical attentuator (eVOA)
Works with the Tap module to provide input for Wavelength Tracker modulation and provides
optical tap for feedback signal to the Wavelength Tracker.
electromagnetic capability (EMC)
EMC is the ability of a device or system to function without error in its intended electromagnetic
environment
electromagnetic interference (EMI)
EMI refers to the emissions (high-energy, electrically induced magnetic fields) from a device or
system that interfere with the normal operation of another device or system.
Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA)
Group that specifies electrical transmission standards. The EIA and TIA have developed
numerous well-known communications standards, including EIA/TIA-232 and EIA/TIA-449.
electrostatic discharge (ESD)
Static electrical energy potentially harmful to circuit packs and humans.
Element Management System (EMS)
The EMS provides an efficient means of managing the equipment and services within a network,
including creating new services, diagnosing faults, and planning for growth. It includes interfaces
to external systems to allow functions such as billing, service orders, and service level agreement
(SLA) management.
EMC
See “electromagnetic capability” (p. GL-8) for definition.
EMI
See “electromagnetic interference” (p. GL-8) for definition.
EMS
See “Element Management System” (p. GL-8) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
GL-8
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EN
European orm; a German acronym that stands for “Europaïsche orm.”
Engineering rules
A set of rules that determine the system configuration possibilities based on fiber type, OA, rate,
and number of wavelengths. These rules also determine the maximum loss per span that can be
tolerated, the maximum distance between spans allowed, and the maximum number of spans that
can be supported.
equipment controller (EC)
EC is the equipment controller card˙,
erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA)
A type of amplifier with a short length of fiber that has been doped with erbium and spliced into
the operating single-mode fiber (SMF) . A three-port wavelength division multiplexer (WDM) is
used, with one incoming port connected to the operating fiber carrying the primary signal in the
1550-nm window, one incoming port attached to a pump laser operating at 980 nm or 1480 nm,
and the one outgoing port connected to the operating fiber.
ESD
See “electrostatic discharge” (p. GL-8) for definition.
Ethernet LAN
A LA conformant to the 802.3 IEEE standard. This standard supports communications over
shared media where only one device can transmit while all other devices listen. A collision
detection and handling mechanism is incorporated into the standard. Devices on the LA
communicate by sending Ethernet packets containing a Media Access Control (MAC) address for
the source and destination. Setting the destination MAC address to all ones supports packet
broadcast to all devices on the LA .
ETSI
See “European Telecommunications Standards Institute” (p. GL-9) for definition.
European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI)
Located in Sophia-Antipolis, France, ETSI is the European counterpart to A SI. Its task is to
pave the way for telecommunications integration in the European community as part of the single
European market program. It establishes telecommunication standards for the European
community.
eVOA
See “electrical variable optical attentuator” (p. GL-8) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
F
failure
Occurs when a fault cause persists for a certain period of time.
failure in time (FIT)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
GL-9
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A unit of failure rate in reliability analysis. One FIT is equivalent to one failure per one billion
operating hours.
failure rate
The number of failures of a device per unit of time.
FC
See “fiber optic connector” (p. GL-10) for definition.
FCC
See “Federal Communications Commission” (p. GL-10) for definition.
FCS
See “frame check sequence” (p. GL-11) for definition.
FDA
See “Food and Drug Administration” (p. GL-11) for definition.
FDDI
See “fiber distributed data interface” (p. GL-10) for definition.
FDI
See “forward defect indicator” (p. GL-11) for definition.
FEC
See “forward error correction” (p. GL-11) for definition.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
The U.S. federal regulatory agency responsible for the regulation of interstate and international
communications by radio, television, wire, satellite, and cable.
Ferrule
A rigid tube that confines or holds a fiber as part of a connector assembly.
fiber distributed data interface (FDDI)
A set of A SI protocols used for sending digital data over fiber optic cable. FDDI networks are
token-passing networks and support data rates of up to 100 Mbps.
fiber optic cable
A cable containing one or more optical fibers.
fiber optic connector (FC)
A threaded optical connector for single-mode or multimode fiber and applications requiring low
back reflection.
field-programmable gate array (FPGA)
General purpose integrated chip; chip's functions can be programmed by software. FPGAs are
mostly used for rapid development and small or medium quantities production.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
GL-10
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
file transfer protocol (FTP)
A protocol used for exchanging files over the Internet. FTP uses the Internet's TCP/IP protocols to
enable data transfer. FTP is most commonly used to download/upload a file to/from a server using
the Internet.
FIT
See “failure in time” (p. GL-9) for definition.
FIT rate
The number of device failures in one billion device hours.
flash disk memory module (FMM)
A nonvolatile memory device used to store the installation software generic or the E database.
flow
Usually refers to the movement of packets within the network (that is, packet flow).
FMM
See “flash disk memory module” (p. GL-11) for definition.
FOADM
Fixed optical add/drop multiplexer/multiplexing.
Food and Drug Administration (FDA)
An agency of the United States Department of Health and Human Services and is responsible for
the safety regulation of most types of foods, dietary supplements, drugs, vaccines, biological
medical products, blood products, medical devices, radiation-emitting devices, veterinary
products, and cosmetics.
forward defect indicator (FDI)
An automatic and fully distributed capability which indicates a failure in a server networking
layer (e.g., Physical Layer). When used with other mechanisms such as CV (Connectivity
Verification), it can indicate defects such as misbranching of LSPs and errors in swapping LSP
label.
forward error correction (FEC)
A technique used for error detection and correction in which the transmitting host computer
includes some number of redundant bits in the payload (data field) of a block or frame of data.
The receiving device uses those bits to detect, isolate and correct any errors created in
transmission. FEC avoids having to retransmit information which incurred errors in network
transit.
FPGA
See “field-programmable gate array” (p. GL-10) for definition.
frame check sequence (FCS)
Extra characters added to a frame for error control purposes. Used in HDLC, Frame Relay, and
other data link layer protocols.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
GL-11
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Fresnel reflection
A reflection of light that occurs at the air-glass interface at the ends of an optical fiber. See “back
reflection” (p. GL-3) for related term.
FTP
See “file transfer protocol” (p. GL-10) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
G
gain
The increase in power and magnitude of a signal.
gateway network element (GNE)
A system node that has a physical attachment to the management system to support the access of
the remote E. The number of remote Es a G E can serve is specified in terms of the number
of OSI stack associations that the G E can support without running out of local resources.
GbE
See “Gigabit Ethernet” (p. GL-12) for definition.
generic framing protocol (GFP)
Provides a generic mechanism to adapt traffic from higher-layer client signals over an
octet-synchronous transport network. Client signals may be PDU oriented (e.g., PPP/IP or
Ethernet MAC), block oriented (e.g., Fiber Channel or ESCO ) or a Constant Bit Rate (CBR)
stream.
GFP
See “generic framing protocol” (p. GL-12) for definition.
Gigabit Ethernet (GBE)
A transmission technology based on the Ethernet frame format and protocol used in local area
networks (LA s) that provides a data rate of one billion bits (one gigabit) per second. Gigabit
Ethernet is defined in the IEEE 802.3 standard and is currently used as the backbone in many
enterprise networks.
glass through-connection
A pair of optical connections between two segments that terminate on the same site.
GNE
See “gateway network element” (p. GL-12) for definition.
graphical user interface (GUI)
A program interface that takes advantage of the computer's graphics capabilities to make the
program easier to use.
grooming
Consolidating or segregating traffic.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
GL-12
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
grooming node
A node on which incoming signals of lower rates are added (or aggregated) into a higher-rate
signal for more efficient transport.
ground
The orth American term for electrical earth.
GUI
See “graphical user interface” (p. GL-12) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
I
ILA
See “in-line amplifier” (p. GL-13) for definition.
in-line amplifier (ILA)
A repeater used in WDM technology. See “repeater” (p. GL-23) for related term.
ingress
Traffic entering a network.
insertion loss
The loss of power that results from inserting a component, such as a connector or splice, into a
previously continuous path.
International Standards Organization (ISO)
A United ations agency concerned with international standardization in a broad range of
industrial and technical fields.
International Telecommunications Union (ITU)
An international civil organization established to promote standardized telecommunications on a
worldwide basis.
Internet protocol (IP)
A standard protocol designed for use in interconnected systems of packet-switched computer
communication networks. The Internet Protocol provides for transmitting blocks of data called
datagrams from sources to destinations, where sources and destinations are hosts identified by
fixed-length addresses. The Internet Protocol also provides for fragmentation and reassembly of
long datagrams, if necessary, for transmission through small-packet networks.
Internet protocol security (IPsec)
A developing standard for security at the network or packet processing layer of network
communication. Earlier security approaches have inserted security at the application layer of the
communications model. IPsec is especially useful for implementing virtual private networks and
for remote user access through dial-up connection to private networks.
Internet service provider (ISP)
A company that provides individuals and other companies access to the Internet and other related
services, such as Web site building and virtual hosting.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
GL-13
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IP
See “Internet protocol” (p. GL-13) for definition.
IPsec (Internet Protocol Security)
See “Internet protocol security” (p. GL-13) for definition.
ISO
See “International Standards Organization” (p. GL-13) for definition.
ISP
See “Internet service provider” (p. GL-13) for definition.
ITU
See “International Telecommunications Union” (p. GL-13) for definition
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
J
jacket
The outer, protective covering of the cable.
jitter
Small and rapid variations in the timing of a waveform due to noise, changes in component
characteristics, supply voltages, or imperfect synchronizing circuits.
jumper
A short fiber optic cable with connectors on both ends.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
L
lambda (λ)
The eleventh letter in the Greek alphabet. In optical fiber networking, the term lambda refers to an
individual optical wavelength. See “wavelength” (p. GL-32) for related term.
laser bias current (LBC)
Current that runs through the laser to make it work. LBC is monitored by performance
monitoring. If the current goes beyond a certain threshold, the circuit pack must be replaced.
LBC
See “laser bias current” (p. GL-14) for definition.
LBO
See “line build out” (p. GL-15) for definition.
LC
See “Lucent connector” (p. GL-15) for definition.
LD
See “line driver” (p. GL-15) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
GL-14
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LGX
A SO ET device that contains ports for optical fiber connections to an optical network element
( E). An LGX is used to make and change connections to an E without changing the cabling on
the E itself.
line build out (LBO)
Attenuation used to simulate a load.
line driver (LD)
Functional unit (circuit pack) providing the OSI model's physical level interface between a data
link and the exchange.
link state advertisement (LSA)
A broadcast message that advertises a link's current status.
LOF
See “loss of frame” (p. GL-15) for definition.
long reach (LR)
An optic standard that constrains the output power of transmitters and the sensitivity of receivers
for long-haul applications (up to 80 km) without the need for regeneration.
LOS
See “loss of service/loss of signal” (p. GL-15) for definition.
loss
The amount of a signal's power, expressed in dB, that is lost in connectors, splices, or fiber
defects.
loss of frame (LOF)
Loss of frame is detected when the OOF (out-of-frame) anomaly persists for a certain time.
loss of service/loss of signal (LOS)
A condition where the optical input power falls below a certain threshold.
LR
See “long reach” (p. GL-15) for definition.
LSA
See “link state advertisement” (p. GL-15) for definition.
Lucent connector (LC)
Designation for a small-form-factor (SFF) design based on a proven 1.25-mm ceramic ferrule.
This connector uses RJ-style latching. It facilitates high-speed applications with lower power
requirements due to lower insertion loss (0.1 dB typical) and higher return loss (55-dB single
mode).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
GL-15
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
M
MAC
See “media access control” (p. GL-16) for definition.
Management Control Panel (MCP)
The Photonic Manager user interface used to issue commands.
management information base (MIB)
A formal description of a set of network objects that can be managed using the Simple etwork
Management Protocol (S MP). The information is represented in a tree format.
margin
The allowance for attenuation in addition to that explicitly accounted for in system design.
master controller (MC)
The system's master controller (MC) card.
MC
See “master controller” (p. GL-16) for definition.
MCP
See “Management Control Panel (MCP)” (p. GL-16) for definition.
mean time between failures (MTBF)
The expected average time between failures usually expressed in hours.
mean time to repair (MTTR)
The average time that it takes until a failure is repaired. MTTR is usually expressed in hours.
media access control (MAC)
The MAC address is a computer's unique hardware number. The MAC address is used by the
media access control sublayer of the data link layer of telecommunications protocols.
mesh
A type of network configuration that combines ROADMs to support mesh channel connectivity
between the ROADMs without O-E-O for transmission. It is operated as a single E with as
many as four degrees (bidirectional DWDM interfaces) that comprise two lines for the east and
two for the west.
MIB
See “management information base” (p. GL-16) for definition.
mid-stage access amplifier (MSA)
An MSA has two amplifier stages between which can be fibered a DCM/DCF card or an external
dispersion compensation unit.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
GL-16
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
modulation
A process that modifies the characteristic of one wave (the carrier) by another wave (the signal).
Examples include amplitude modulation (AM), frequency modulation (FM), and pulse-coded
modulation (PCM).
MSA
See “mid-stage access amplifier” (p. GL-16) for definition.
MTBF
See “mean time between failures” (p. GL-16) for definition.
MTTR
See “mean time to repair” (p. GL-16) for definition.
multimode fiber
An optical fiber that has a core large enough to propagate more than one mode of light. The
typical diameter is 62.5 micrometers.
multiplexer (MUX)
A device that combines two or more signals into a single output.
multiplexing
The process that transmits two or more signals over a single communications channel. Examples
include time-division multiplexing and wavelength-division multiplexing.
MUX
See “multiplexer” (p. GL-17) for definition.
muxponder
A networking device that multiplexes and transponds GbE signals.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
N
NE
See “network element” (p. GL-17) for definition.
NEBS
See “ etwork Equipment Building System requirements” (p. GL-18) for definition.
network element (NE)
Processor-controlled entity of a telecommunications network that primarily provides switching
and transport network functions and contains network operations functions.
For 1830 PSS, a configuration of 1830 PSS equipment at a single site, addressed as a single entity,
and under the control of a single controller ( E). The types of Es are ILA (in-line amplifier) and
ADM (add/drop multiplexer).
Network Element Management System (NMS)
The MS provides an efficient means of managing the equipment and services within a network,
including creating new services, diagnosing faults, and planning for growth. It has interfaces to
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
GL-17
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
external systems to allow functions such as billing, service orders, and service level agreement
(SLA) management.
Network Equipment Building System requirements (NEBS)
Developed by Telcordia, standards that vendors must adhere to if they want to sell equipment to
the Regional Bell Operating Companies (RBOCs) and the Competitive Local Exchange Carriers
(CLECs).
network services
Services that the network provider creates only as infrastructure to support user services. For
example, a VP network service is used to implement an Ethernet service.
network time protocol (NTP)
Internet protocol used to synchronize time between network equipment.
NMS
See “ etwork Element Management System” (p. GL-17) for definition.
node
A node (or network element) is a set of one or more Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelves that are
viewed as a single entity by the etwork Management System. A node can be any of the
following:
•
up to two single optical shelves
•
a single electrical shelf
•
a single electrical shelf and one or more optical shelves
non-service affecting (NSA)
Refers to a condition that does not impact or interfere with network service.
NSA
See “non-service affecting” (p. GL-18) for definition.
NTP
See “network time protocol” (p. GL-18) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
O
OA
See “optical amplifier” (p. GL-19) for definition.
OAMP
Operations, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning.
OC-n
See “optical carrier level-n” (p. GL-19) for definition.
Occupational Safety and Health Administration) (OSHA)
OSHA is the main American federal agency charged with the enforcement of safety and health
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
GL-18
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
legislation.
OCHAN or OCh
See “optical channel” (p. GL-20) for definition.
ODU
See “optical demultiplexer” (p. GL-20) for definition.
ODU-k
An optical logical connection with a specific rate. The rate can be either ODU-10G or ODU-40G.
OEO
See “optical-electrical-optical conversion” (p. GL-20) for definition.
OOF
See “out of frame” (p. GL-21) for definition.
Open Systems Interconnection reference model (OSI)
A seven-layer model that pertains to the logical structure for communications networks
standardized by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO). Adherence to the
standard enables any OSI-compliant system to communicate with any other OSI-compliant
system.
Operations Support System (OSS)
A management system supporting a specific management function, such as alarm surveillance or
provisioning, in a carrier network. Many OSSs are large centralized systems running on
mainframes or minicomputers.
OPR
See “optical path restoration” (p. GL-20) for definition.
OPS
See “optical protection switch” (p. GL-20) for definition.
optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM)
An OADM is a network element which allows a WDM transmission link to add or drop optical
signals, without converting the photonic stream into an electrical signal. Insertion and extraction
are done using optical filters or demultiplexers. An OADM can be either non-reconfigurable or
reconfigurable; in the latter case, optical switches need to be used.
optical amplifier (OA)
A device that amplifies an input optical signal without converting it into electrical form.
optical carrier level-n (OC-n)
A carrier rate specified in the SO ET standard, where n is a numeric.
optical cell
A number of nodes connected by fiber in a predefined manner to provide route diversity to each
node. The simplest form of optical cell is a ring. Statically allocated wavelengths are assigned
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
GL-19
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
within the context of one cell.
optical channel (OCHAN, Och)
An optical wavelength band for WDM optical communications.
optical demultiplexer (ODU)
Value/indicator used for an optical demultiplexer.
optical path protection (OPP)
A protection path is defined when the connection is set up. When a fault is detected on the path,
there is a switch-over from the working path to the protection path to restore the traffic.
optical path restoration (OPR)
A recovery scheme that dynamically finds a protection path when a fault is detected. This method
is usually not capable of matching SDH/SO ET recovery time periods (for example, 50 ms).
optical power meter
An instrument that measures the amount of optical power present at the end of a fiber or cable.
optical protection switch (OPS)
An optical circuit pack that provides WDM protection.
optical signal to noise ratio (OSNR)
The ratio between the optical signal power of the data signal and the power of the optical noise
signal.
optical supervisory channel (OSC)
A designated optical channel used to carry communications related to maintenance and
operational functions of the network rather than customer traffic.
The OSC supports the following communications: node-to-node, interworking, client LA , and
orderwire communication.
optical transponder (OT)
An OT is a circuit pack that performs optical-to-electrical to optical (OEO) conversion.
OTs perform frequency adaptation between 1830 PSS equipment and external equipment that is
not optically compatible with 1830 PSS Transport. OTs also provide 3R functionality (retiming,
reshaping, reamplification) and perform fault management and performance monitoring
(non-intrusive monitoring) on the SO ET/SDH and WaveWrapper signal.
optical transport network (OTN)
A fiber-optic network designed to transport customer traffic, such as an SDH or SO ET network.
See “Synchronous Digital Hierarchy” (p. GL-28) and “Synchronous Optical etwork” (p. GL-28)
for examples.
optical-electrical-optical conversion (OEO)
The process of converting an optical signal to an electrical equivalent and then back to optical
data.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
GL-20
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
orderwire
A section of the supervisory signal that is used for communication between sites.
OSC
See “optical supervisory channel” (p. GL-20) for definition.
OSHA
See “Occupational Safety and Health Administration)” (p. GL-18) for definition.
OSI
See “Open Systems Interconnection reference model” (p. GL-19) for definition.
OSNR
See “optical signal to noise ratio” (p. GL-20) for definition.
OSP
See “outside plant” (p. GL-21) for definition.
OSS
See “Operations Support System” (p. GL-19) for definition.
OT
See “optical transponder” (p. GL-20) for definition.
OTN
See “optical transport network” (p. GL-20) for definition.
out of frame (OOF)
A state in which the frame alignment sequence of an SDH/SO ET frame has not been found for
several consecutive frames.
outside plant (OSP)
Refers to outside the central office/building premises.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
P
PCS
See “physical coding sublayer” (p. GL-22) for definition.
PDL
See “polarization dependent loss” (p. GL-22) for definition.
PDU
See “protocol data unit” (p. GL-22) for definition.
performance monitoring (PM)
Measures the quality of service and identifies any degrading or marginally operating systems
(before an alarm would be generated).
photonic cross-connect (PXC)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
GL-21
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A fiber cross-connect that operates without optical-electrical-optical conversion. It can have one
or more wavelengths on each fiber or port.
photonic protection switch (PPS)
By provisioning of PPS cards (or optical splitters), automatic protection switch (APS) are
automatically created.
physical coding sublayer (PCS)
PCS layer monitoring used for Ethernet/FC ports.
PM
See “performance monitoring” (p. GL-21) for definition.
PMD
See “polarization mode dispersion” (p. GL-22) for definition.
point-to-point transmission
The transmission between two designated stations.
polarization dependent loss (PDL)
Loss of optical power that occurs during the polarization process. Polarized light waves are light
waves in which the vibrations occur in a single plane. The process of transforming unpolarized
light into polarized light is known as polarization (the orientation of the electric and magnetic
field vectors of a propagating electro-magnetic wave).
polarization mode dispersion (PMD)
PMD is an inherent property of all optical media. It is caused by the difference in the propagation
velocities of light in the orthogonal principal polarization states of the transmission medium. The
net effect is that if an optical pulse contains both polarization components, then the different
polarization components will travel at different speeds and arrive at different times, smearing the
received optical signal.
PPS
See “photonic protection switch” (p. GL-22) for definition.
protocol data unit (PDU)
A device used for the information exchange between equal protocol layers.
provisioning
Placing and configuring hardware and software required to activate a telecommunications service
for a customer. If the equipment is in place, provisioning may consist of creating or modifying a
customer record in a database to activate the services.
PXC
See “photonic cross-connect” (p. GL-21) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
GL-22
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Q
QoS
See “quality of service” (p. GL-23) for definition.
quality of service (QoS)
A set of performance parameters that characterize the transmission quality over a given virtual
connection.
QoS can be quantitatively indicated by channel or system performance parameters, such as
signal-to-noise ratio, bit error ratio, message throughput rate, and call blocking probability.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
R
rack
A rack is the standardized physical framework on which network equipment such as
Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelves are mounted. A rack can contain more than one shelf. Also
called bay frames.
random jitter (RJ)
Random jitter is caused by thermal noise and may be modeled as a Gaussian process. The
peak-to-peak value of RJ is of a probabilistic nature, and thus any specific value requires an
associated probability.
receiver
A terminal device that includes a detector and signal processing electronics. It functions as an
optical-to-electrical converter.
receiver sensitivity
The minimum optical power required at a receiver to deliver traffic at a guaranteed bit error rate
(BER). This parameter is specified back-to-back (without the effects of chromatic dispersion or
OS R degradation).
reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM)
An optical network element with a configuration that can be changed remotely. The main benefit
of this remote reconfigurability is that it reduces Operating Expenditures (OPEX) when operating
a DWDM network. OPEX is reduced because the ROADM eases network provisioning and line
tuning at both the initial installation and any upgrades (to increase the capacity or re-allocate
resources to a new demand matrix).
regeneration
Electrical signal regeneration. Typically, OTUk Section regeneration and ODUk transparency is
implied in this context.
remote network monitoring (RMON)
Provides statistics for remote performance monitoring. Defined in standard RFC 2819.
repeater
A receiver and transmitter set designed to amplify attenuated signals. Repeaters are used to extend
operating range. See “in-line amplifier” (p. GL-13) for related term.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
GL-23
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
request for comment (RFC)
A document that describes the specifications of a technology. RFCs are used by the Internet
Engineering Task Force (IETF) and other standards bodies.
restoration domain
A part of the network where traffic restoration is provided in isolation from the rest of the
network.
RFC
See “request for comment” (p. GL-23) for definition.
RIP
See “routing information protocol” (p. GL-24) for definition.
RJ
See “random jitter” (p. GL-23) for definition.
RMON
See “remote network monitoring” (p. GL-23) for definition.
ROADM
See “reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer” (p. GL-23) for definition.
routing information protocol (RIP)
RIP is an interior gateway protocol defined by the IETF (RIPv1 - RFC 1058 and RIPv2 - 2453)
that specifies how routers exchange routing table information. RIP is a routing protocol based on
the distance vector algorithm. With RIP, routers periodically exchange entire tables.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
S
SA
See “service affecting” (p. GL-25) for definition.
SAN
See “storage area network” (p. GL-27) for definition.
SC
See “shelf controller” (p. GL-25) for definition.
scattering
The change of direction of light rays or photons after striking small particles. It may also be
regarded as the diffusion of a light beam caused by the inhomogeneity of the transmitting
material.
SCOT
See “software control of transmission” (p. GL-26) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
GL-24
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SDH
See “Synchronous Digital Hierarchy” (p. GL-28) for definition.
secure shell (SSH)
A secure method of transmitting data.
segment
A pair of OSP fibers connecting two sites.
SELV
Safety extra low voltage.
service affecting (SA)
Refers to a condition that impacts or interferes with network service.
Service Level Agreement (SLA)
A contract between a network service provider and a customer that specifies, usually in
measurable terms, what services the network service provider will provide.
services
Within the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 system, services can be offered directly to end customers
or be used internally to a network as transport infrastructure.
SFC
See “static filter, CWDM” (p. GL-27) for definition.
SFD
See “static filter, DWDM” (p. GL-27) for definition.
SFP
See “small form-factor pluggable module” (p. GL-26) for definition.
shared risk group (SRG)
A shared risk group is a group of items that are likely to be affected by a single fault. The items
therefore share the risk of experiencing the fault.
shelf
A shelf is a mechanical facility that is in general a housing for circuit packs. Shelves are housed in
Bays.
An Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 node consists of one or more physical shelves equipped with
cards. The shelf provides a chassis or cage with a backplane that can contain multiple cards. The
shelf is mounted in a rack. Each shelf has a shelf controller card, plus its redundant mate. Every
node has one shelf that has its shelf controllers designated as the master controller for the node.
The node appears as a single point in the network topology to the network management system.
Connections between nodes use network links. See “node” (p. GL-18) for related term.
shelf controller (SC)
The SC card in a Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
GL-25
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
signaling transfer point (STP)
A node in a common channel signalling network with the function of transferring messages from
one signalling link to another and considered exclusively from the viewpoint of the transfer
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
S MP is the protocol used to communicate between the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 nodes and
the MS. The S MP traffic is carried over the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 control network.
simplex
A single element (for example, a simplex connector is a single-fiber connector).
single-mode fiber (SMF)
A type of fiber which is very small in diameter and allows the light to be reflected in a single way
along the lightguide such that there is coherence in the arrival of the light signal.
site
The termination location of OSP cables. Each site can contain one or more Es and one or more
glass-through connections.
SLA
See “Service Level Agreement” (p. GL-25) for definition.
small form-factor pluggable module (SFP)
An optical modular, hot-pluggable transceiver (compatible with IEEE-802.3z) designed for use
with small form factor (SFF) connectors, offering high speed and physical compactness. SFP
transceivers perform at data speeds of up to 5 gigabits per second, and possibly higher.
The SFP modules can be easily interchanged, therefore, electro-optical or fiber optic networks can
be upgraded and maintained more conveniently than has been the case with traditional soldered-in
modules. Rather than replacing an entire circuit board containing several soldered-in modules, a
single module can be removed and replaced for repair or upgrading. This can result in a
substantial cost savings, both in maintenance and in upgrading efforts.
SMF
See “single-mode fiber” (p. GL-26) for definition.
SNCP
See “Sub- etwork Connection Protocol” (p. GL-28) for definition.
SNMP
See “Simple etwork Management Protocol” (p. GL-26) for definition.
software control of transmission (SCOT)
System software that controls the settings of EDFA pumps, VOAs, Raman pumps, DCM pumps,
DGEFs, and blockers in the ROADM Es.
software generic (SW generic)
The whole software and (static) data associated with a particular E release.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
GL-26
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SONET
See “Synchronous Optical etwork” (p. GL-28) for definition.
SONET wavelength service
The SO ET wavelength service provides transport of SO ET signals through the Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-32 network.
span
A fiber link between Es that can be unidirectional or bidirectional, depending on the network
design. Multiple segments in tandem are connected by glass-through connections.
span loss
Loss (in dB) of optical power due to the span transmission medium (includes fiber loss and splice
losses).
splice
A permanent connection of two optical fibers through fusion or mechanical means.
SRG
See “shared risk group” (p. GL-25) for definition.
SSH
See “secure shell” (p. GL-25) for definition.
SSMF
See “standard single-mode fiber” (p. GL-27) for definition.
ST
See “straight-tip connector” (p. GL-28) for definition.
standard single-mode fiber (SSMF)
This is the most common type of fiber deployed. This fiber was designed to provide zero
chromatic dispersion at 1310 nm, to support the early long-haul transmission systems operating at
this wavelength. It has a chromatic dispersion of at most 20 ps/(nm*km) in the 1550 nm
wavelength range and usually around 17 ps/(nm*km).
static filter, CWDM (SFC)
A static filter card used with a CWDM circuit pack.
static filter, DWDM (SFD)
A static filter card used with a DWDM circuit pack.
storage area network (SAN)
A high-speed special-purpose network (or subnetwork) that interconnects different kinds of data
storage devices with associated data servers on behalf of a larger network of users.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
GL-27
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
STP
See “signaling transfer point” (p. GL-25) for definition.
straight-tip connector (ST)
Fiber optic connector that uses a bayonet-style coupling rather than a screw-on coupling.
STS, STS-n
See “synchronous transport signal-n” (p. GL-28) for definition.
Sub-Network Connection Protocol (SNCP)
An SDH version of UPSR. See SDH and UPSR.
SW generic
See “software generic” (p. GL-26) for definition.
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
A family of digital transmission rates used outside of the U.S. and Japan from 51.84 Mb/s to 40
Gb/s that allows the interconnection of transmission products around the world.
SDH is the standard technology for synchronous data transmission on optical media. It is the
international equivalent of Synchronous Optical etwork (SO ET). Both SDH and SO ET
technologies provide faster and less costly network interconnection than traditional
Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH) equipment.
Synchronous Optical Network (SONET)
A orth-American standard developed by Telecordia and adapted by A SI for the optical
long-distance networks.
SO ET is the interface standard for synchronous optical-fiber transmission, applicable to the
physical layer of the OSI reference model. SO ET has a basic bit rate of 51.840 mB/s, called
OC-1, that is used to define higher rates (OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, and so on) carried as a channel on
an optical fiber.
synchronous signal
A data signal that is sent along with a clock signal.
synchronous transport signal-n (STS, STS-n)
The basic logical building block signal with a rate of 51.840 Mb/s for an STS-1 signal and a rate
of n times 51.840 Mb/s for an STS-n signal (where n is a numeric).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
T
tap
The entry point into a system module.
target identifier (TID)
A provisionable parameter used to identify an E within a TL1 command.
TCA
See “threshold crossing alert” (p. GL-29) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
GL-28
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TCP
See “Transmission Control Protocol” (p. GL-30) for definition.
TCP/IP
A suite of several networking protocols developed for the Internet that provides communication
across interconnected networks, between computers with diverse hardware architectures and
various operating systems. Some examples are FTP, SMTP, and S MP.
TDM
See “time-division multiplexing” (p. GL-29) for definition.
Telecommunications Management Network (TMN)
A network that interfaces with a telecommunications network at several points to receive
information from, and to control the operation of, the telecommunications network.
thermal noise
oise resulting from thermally induced random fluctuation in the receiver's load resistance
current.
threshold crossing alert (TCA)
A condition set when a counter exceeds a user-selected high or low threshold. A TCA does not
generate an alarm but is available on demand through the CIT.
TID
See “target identifier” (p. GL-28) for definition.
time-division multiplexing (TDM)
A multiplexing technique whereby two or more channels are derived from a transmission medium
by dividing access to the medium into sequential intervals. Each channel has access to the entire
bandwidth of the medium during its interval. This implies that one transmitter uses one channel to
send several bit streams of information.
TL1 (Transaction language 1)
An OS/ E machine-to-machine language. TL1 messages are expressed as ASCII strings. TL1
messages and syntax are defined by Telecordia.
TMN
See “Telecommunications Management etwork” (p. GL-29) for definition.
TOADM
See “tunable optical add/drop multiplexer” (p. GL-30) for definition.
topology
The pattern of interconnections between nodes in a network, such as a ring or hub. A network
topology database contains information regarding each link in the network.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
GL-29
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
traffic grooming
Traffic can be consolidated, aggregated, or separated to achieve efficiencies of routing.
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)
A protocol used with the Internet Protocol to send data in the form of message units between
computers over the Internet. While IP handles the actual delivery of the data, TCP keeps track of
the individual units of data (called packets) that a message is divided into for efficient routing
through the Internet.
traps (SNMP)
S MP traps are unacknowledged events sent from an agent to a manager. In a Alcatel-Lucent
1830 PSS-32 network, the agent is the node and the manager is EMS.
tunable optical add/drop multiplexer (TOADM)
A tunable ROADM that yields the ultimate in operational flexibility, especially when used in
conjunction with transponders with tunable wavelength lasers.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
U
UDP
See “user datagram protocol” (p. GL-30) for definition.
UL
See “Underwriters Laboratories” (p. GL-30) for definition.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
A U.S. non-profit privately owned and operated product safety testing and certification
organization. Develops standards and test procedures for products, materials, components,
assemblies, tools and equipment, chiefly dealing with product safety.
unidirectional path-switched ring (UPSR)
A survivable, closed loop transport architecture that protects against cable cuts and node failures
by providing duplicate, geographically diverse paths for each service. Adjacent nodes on the ring
are interconnected using a single pair of optical fibers. One fiber transports traffic in one direction
(for example, clockwise), while the second fiber transports traffic in the opposite direction (for
example, counterclockwise). In a UPSR, the source node bridges its outgoing traffic along
opposite directions around the ring (on paths provided by SO ET synchronous transport
channels). In contrast to BLSR, a UPSR:
•
is path-specific as opposed to line specific
•
does not allow extra traffic (because traffic is bridged)
•
requires less coordination from source to destination (because the destination network
element can make all its decisions without involving the source)
UPSR
See “unidirectional path-switched ring” (p. GL-30) for definition.
user datagram protocol (UDP)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
GL-30
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A minimal, datagram-oriented, transport network protocol above the IP network layer that does
not guarantee data ordering or delivery. Because it is datagram-oriented, each send operation by
the application results in the transmission of a single IP datagram. This contrasts with the
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) which is byte stream oriented and guarantees the delivery
and ordering of the bytes sent. Because it is a byte stream oriented, a single send operation may
result in a no IP datagrams (buffering), a single IP datagram, or multiple IP datagrams.
user services
Services that the network provider can sell to their customers, such as Ethernet service.
UTC
Coordinated universal time.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
V
variable optical attenuator (VOA)
A device used to set the attenuation of the power received over a fiber to a level required by the
receiving equipment.
VCAT
See “virtual concatenation” (p. GL-31) for definition.
very short reach (VSR)
A SO ET/SDH interface that provides a low-cost interconnection solution of less than 300
meters between routers, switches, and DWDM systems.
virtual concatenation (VCAT)
Defines an inverse multiplexing procedure whereby the contiguous bandwidth is broken into
individual Virtual Containers (VC) at the source transmitter and logically represented in a Virtual
Concatenation Group (VCG). VCG members are transported as individual VCs across the
SO ET/SDH network and recombined at the destination VCG receiver. While contiguous
concatenation requires concatenation functionality at each network element, virtual concatenation
do not.
virtual time-slot (VTS)
1830 PSS-1 GBE Edge Device has a fixed assignment of 10 Virtual Time Slots to each line port.
VOA
See “variable optical attenuator” (p. GL-31) for definition.
VSR
See “very short reach” (p. GL-31) for definition.
VTS
See “virtual time-slot” (p. GL-31) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
GL-31
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
W
wave division multiplexing (WDM)
WDM merges optical traffic onto one common fiber, sending several signals through one fiber
with different wavelengths of light. WDM allows flexibility in expanding bandwidth. It reduces
costly mux/demux function, and it reuses existing optical signals.See dense wave division
multiplexing (DWDM).
wave key
A component of the Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability that is used to identify individual
wavelengths through the network.
A wave key is a number between 1 and 2048. Each WDM wavelength in a 1830 PSS-32 network
is uniquely identified by a pair of wave keys.
waveguide
A material medium that confines and guides a propagating electromagnetic wave.
waveguide coupler
A coupler that transfers light between planar waveguides.
wavelength
The distance between points of corresponding phase of two consecutive cycles of a wave,
typically measured in nanometers (nm). The wavelength is related to the propagation velocity and
the frequency. (Also called lambda.)
wavelength growth
A type of growth in which all eight wavelengths are added to a single line before more lines are
added.
Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability
Wavelength Tracker monitoring capability is a patented feature of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32
which allows for the tracking of wavelengths through the Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 network,
and for the measuring of the wavelengths' optical power levels at certain points along their paths.
WaveWrapper
WaveWrapper provides network management functions such as optical-layer performance
monitoring, error correction, and ring protection on a per-wavelength basis.
WDM
See “wave division multiplexing” (p. GL-32) for definition.
WDM demand
The termination points and signal type of a service that is to be carried by the WDM network.
WDM line
A contiguous series of spans terminated by a ROADM at each end. A WDM line can be a single
span or a series of spans joined by the in-line amplifiers (ILAs).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
GL-32
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Web user interface (WebUI)
A computer interface that provides web-based access to the network element ( E).
WebUI
See “Web user interface” (p. GL-32) for definition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
X
XFP (10-gigabit small form factor pluggable module)
A pluggable optical transceiver module that combines transmitter and receiver functions in one
compact, flexible, and low cost package format. Up to sixteen XFP modules can be arranged on a
typical rack card, allowing for an unprecedented level of data density. XFP is protocol
independent, are can support OC-192/STM-64, 10 Gigabit Ethernet, 10 Gigabit Fibre Channel,
and G.709 data streams in routers, switches and network cards. Reaches ranging from Very Short
Reach (VSR) to Long Reach (LR) can also be supported.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Y
Y-coupler
A coupler that has three waveguide legs joined at the center in a "Y" shape which connects an
input port to two output ports or two input ports to a single output port.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Z
ZIC (zero installation craft)
An E-imbedded graphical user interface (GUI) application for local operation and maintenance.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
GL-33
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Index
A alarm troubleshooting, 4-17
documentation
alarms
acknowledging, 4-8
clearing, 4-10
Wavelength Tracker™, 4-17
audience
audience, xiii
alarms, 4-2
conventions, xiii, xiii
navigating, 3-1
Duplicate WaveKey alarm
troubleshooting, 4-27
history, viewing, 4-11
.............................................................
E events
documentation, xiii
system, monitoring, 4-1
.............................................................
.............................................................
B background
I
map, defining, 3-2
.............................................................
C client session
information
new with this issue, xiii
Invalid WaveKey alarm
troubleshooting, 4-29
logging out, 2-31
.............................................................
starting, 2-28
L links
command syntax
conventions, xiv
conventions
command syntax, xiv
documentation, xiii, xiii
.............................................................
D database
backup, 2-36
Windows 2000, starting, 2-26
Windows 2000, stopping, 2-27
network
topologies, 3-3
logging out
client session, 2-31
network elements
moving, 3-2
network link
topology, showing, 3-16
etwork management server, 1-1
etwork Management System
( MS)
communication, 1-3
hardware configuration, 1-2
overview, 1-1
.............................................................
O optical power levels, 3-23
BOF WDM port, 3-24
channel path, 3-23
.............................................................
P power out of range alarm
.............................................................
troubleshooting, 4-29
M Missing WaveKey alarm
troubleshooting, 4-24
.............................................................
S server
.............................................................
starting, 2-21
N navigation
types of, 3-2
stopping, 2-21
server and client, 2-1
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
8DG60013 JAAA
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
IN-1
Issue 1 November 2009
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Index
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
servers
Solaris, stopping, 2-25
Windows 2000, starting, 2-26
Windows 2000, stopping, 2-27
services
creating, 5-4
listing and editing, 5-2
managing, 5-1
WI , 5-4
Solaris
server, starting, 2-23
server, stopping, 2-25
system
events, monitoring, 4-1
.............................................................
T Telnet
cut-thru, 3-42, 3-43, 3-44
topologies
geographical location,
topologies, 3-2
.............................................................
W WaveKey insertion failed alarm
troubleshooting, 4-23
WaveKeys
querying, 4-22
used for a service, 4-21
Wavelength Tracker™, 3-22, 4-17
wavelength usage matrix, 5-4
WI , 5-4
Windows 2000
database, starting, 2-26
database, stopping, 2-27
server, starting, 2-26
server, stopping, 2-27
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent – Internal
8DG60013 JAAA
Proprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction
Issue 1 November 2009
IN-2